Professional Documents
Culture Documents
SYH Industria Ethernet Networking Manual 76
SYH Industria Ethernet Networking Manual 76
Part A: Basics of
communication with 1
Industrial Ethernet
Part C: SCALANCE W
wireless network 7
components
Part C: SCALANCE S
security components 8
Appendix A
06
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Topics such as product properties or supported network topologies are therefore described
more than once at various points in this book. The various aspects that are in the foreground
for the reader at a particular point are then highlighted.
6.7.6.3 Connectors of the power supply (X1) of the SCALANCE X-400 .............................................. 313
6.7.6.4 Connectors of the signaling contact and grounding strap (X2) of the SCALANCE X-400 ....... 314
6.7.6.5 Connectors of the digital inputs (X2) of the SCALANCE X414-3E ........................................... 315
6.7.6.6 Note........................................................................................................................................... 316
6.7.7 Dimension drawings X-400 ....................................................................................................... 317
6.7.7.1 SCALANCE X408-2 .................................................................................................................. 317
6.7.7.2 SCALANCE X-414-3E............................................................................................................... 319
6.7.8 X-400 technical specifications................................................................................................... 321
6.7.8.1 SCALANCE X414-3E and X408-2 - technical specifications.................................................... 321
6.7.9 Media modules.......................................................................................................................... 324
6.7.9.1 Installing / removing a media module ....................................................................................... 324
6.7.9.2 Display elements of the media modules ................................................................................... 326
6.7.9.3 Technical specifications of the media modules......................................................................... 326
6.7.10 Extender modules ..................................................................................................................... 328
6.7.10.1 Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 328
6.7.10.2 Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 333
6.7.10.3 Technical specifications of the extender modules .................................................................... 336
7 Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components ........................................................................... 339
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules .................................................................... 339
7.1.1 Designation of the SCALANCE W product lines....................................................................... 339
7.1.2 Certifications and approvals of the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR........................... 340
7.1.3 Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 343
7.1.3.1 Securing the housing ................................................................................................................ 343
7.1.3.2 Installation instructions for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR ................................. 343
7.1.4 Display elements of SCALANCE W.......................................................................................... 347
7.1.4.1 LEDs on the W-788................................................................................................................... 347
7.1.4.2 LEDs of the W-740PRO/RR clients .......................................................................................... 349
7.1.5 Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients ............... 349
7.1.6 Dimension drawing W-788/W-740PRO/RR .............................................................................. 351
7.1.7 Technical specifications for the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR and W74x-1PRO/RR .............. 351
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points ........................................................................................... 354
7.2.1 Certifications and approvals, degree of protection ................................................................... 354
7.2.1.1 Certifications and approvals for the SCALANCE W786 ........................................................... 354
7.2.1.2 Degree of protection.................................................................................................................. 355
7.2.2 Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 355
7.2.2.1 Removing / fitting the housing cover......................................................................................... 355
7.2.2.2 Connecting up cables................................................................................................................ 357
7.2.2.3 Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only) ................................................................... 360
7.2.3 LED display ............................................................................................................................... 362
7.2.4 Connector pin assignment W-786............................................................................................. 365
7.2.5 SCALANCE W786 technical specifications .............................................................................. 365
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points ........................................................................................... 369
7.3.1 Certifications for SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1................................................................... 369
7.3.2 Technical specifications of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1............................................. 371
7.3.3 Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 372
7.3.3.1 Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only) ................................................................... 372
7.3.3.2 Lightning protection, power supply, and grounding .................................................................. 374
7.3.3.3 Connectors for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1............................... 376
7.3.3.4 Connection for Industrial Ethernet ............................................................................................ 378
7.3.3.5 Connectors for external antennas............................................................................................. 379
7.3.3.6 Mounting with adapter plate ...................................................................................................... 380
8 Part C: SCALANCE S security components .......................................................................................... 383
1.1 Terminology
"Industrial Ethernet"
The term "Industrial Ethernet" covers a series of expansions to the Ethernet standard (IEEE
802) with which communication suitable for an industrial environment is implemented. The
main aims are as follows:
● Deterministic data transmission (guaranteed response times and data rates)
● Safeguarding against component failure
● Network topologies adapted to a particular plant with the emphasis on linear (bus),
redundant network structures.
The components must meet the following requirements:
● Equipment designed for industry (signaling contacts, protected cables and cable
connectors),
● Resistant to extreme conditions (temperature, vibration, pollution, electromagnetic
interference etc.)
"PROFINET"
PROFINET is the name of the standard for Industrial Ethernet developed and maintained by
the PROFIBUS user organization. PROFINET unites protocols and specifications with which
Industrial Ethernet meets the requirements of industrial automation technology.
These include, for example:
● Real-time conditions,
● Environment strongly affected by EMI,
SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET stands for a wide range of network components grouped under the motto
"Totally Integrated Automation" to reflect the modern fully integrated implementation of
automation solutions. PROFINET is the protocol used by SIMATIC NET components within
the framework of Industrial Ethernet.
Fast Ethernet
Fast Ethernet is the further development of the Ethernet technology with data rates of 100
Mbps. The Fast Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3 u is based essentially on the classic Ethernet
standard.
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet have the following common features:
● Data format
● Access Methods (Page 29)
They differ from each other in the following respects:
● Network span
● Rules for network design
● Autosensing, the automatic detection of the transmission rate
● Higher data rate (see below)
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet is an expansion of the Ethernet specifications to increase the data
transmission rate to 1000 Mbps or 1 Gbps. The relevant standards are IEEE 802.3z for
transmission over glass fiber and IEEE 802.3ab for electrical cable. An even faster standard
with 10 Gbps (IEEE 802.3an for electrical cable, IEEE 802.3 ae for fiber-optic cable) is
currently being introduced.
Apart from making adaptations to the protocol, the increase in transmission speed is also
achieved by the network nodes having suitably powerful ports and by the use of highly
immune category "5e" twisted-pair cables on the electrical connections.
See also
Transmission procedures and real-time response (Page 26)
Fault tolerance and redundancy (Page 28)
1.2.2 PROFINET
G_D211_EN_00051
Process
Real-Time
Safety Communication
PROFINET
IT-Standards Distributed
& Security Field Devices
Network- Motion
Installation Control
Distributed
Intelligence
PROFINET is the innovative and open Industrial Ethernet standard (IEC 61918, for
PROFINET also IEC 61784-5-3) for industrial automation.
PROFINET uses the existing IT standards and allows end-to-end communication from the
field level to the management level as well as plant-wide engineering.
Real-time communication
PROFINET is based on Industrial Ethernet and uses the TCP/IP standard (Transport Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) for parameter assignment, configuration and diagnostics. Real-
time communication for the transfer of user/process data uses the same cable. PROFINET
can support the following real-time properties:
● With the option of prioritizing the bus nodes, Real Time (RT) uses the optimization or the
communications stack in the switch. This allows high-speed data transfer with standard
network components in automation.
● Isochronous Real Time (IRT): Hardware-supported real-time communication allows,
among other things, isochronous data transfer with very short update times for highly
dynamic motion control applications.
Fieldbus integration
PROFINET allows the simple integration of existing fieldbus systems. To allow this, a proxy
is used; on the one hand this is the master of the PROFIBUS or AS-Interface system, on the
other hand it is a node on Industrial Ethernet and supports PROFINET communication. This
protects the investment of plant operators, machine and plant assemblers and device
manufacturers.
Motion control
Based on PROFINET, isochronous real time (IRT) can be used to implement extremely fast
isochronous mode drive controls for high-speed motion control applications without great
effort.
The standardized drive profile PROFIdrive allows vendor-independent communication
between motion controllers and drives, regardless of the bus system - Industrial Ethernet or
PROFIBUS.
Standard IT functions can be used at the same time on the same cable without impairing
real-time communication.
Network installation
With PROFINET, the network can be installed without any specialist knowledge. At the same
time, the open standard based on Ethernet meets all the requirements relevant to an
industrial environment. PROFINET allows the simple setup of the usual network topologies
such as star, tree, linear bus and ring for increased availability using cabling designed for
industry.
Wireless networks
PROFINET provides new functions and applications for wireless communication with
Industrial Wireless LAN. This makes is possible to replace technologies subject to wear and
tear such as slip rings and allows the use of automated guided vehicle systems or
personalized operator control and maintenance devices. Industrial WLAN is based on
standards but also offers additional features to allow high-speed linking of field devices to
controllers:
● "Data reservation" is used to reserve bandwidth between an access point and defined
clients. This guarantees high and reliable performance for this client regardless of the
number of clients operating with the access point.
● "Rapid Roaming" for extremely fast handover of mobile nodes between different access
points and therefore fast cyclic data communication (iPCF).
IT standards
Within the framework of Web integration, the data of PROFINET components are
represented in HTML or XML format.
Regardless of the tool used, information at the automation level can be accessed with one of
the commonly used Internet browsers from any location greatly simplifying commissioning
and diagnostics. ("Web Based Management")
Security
PROFINET defines a graduated security concept that can be used without specialist
knowledge and that largely excludes operator error, unauthorized access and manipulation
without any detrimental effect on production. This functionality is provided by the
SCALANCE S product family with software and hardware modules.
Safety
The safety profile PROFIsafe (complying with safety standard IEC 61508) that was tried and
tested with PROFIBUS and that allows the transmission of standard and safety-oriented data
on one bus cable can be used regardless of the bus medium. PROFIsafe is the first profile
certified by the German TÜV for failsafe communication for Ethernet. This also allows
wireless communication for failsafe applications with Industrial Wireless LAN.
PROFINET therefore allows the implementation of failsafe applications with end-to-end
configuration in the entire network – whether planning new systems or upgrading existing
systems.
Process
PROFINET is the standard for all applications in automation. With its integration in
PROFIBUS, it also covers the process industry - even including hazardous areas.
See also
PROFINET communication services (Page 23)
The PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA communications services provide the functionality
required by automation systems.
PROFINET IO
● PROFINET IO allows the direct connection of distributed field devices (IO devices, for
example signal modules) to Industrial Ethernet. To further support failsafe applications,
the devices communicate over PROFINET IO with the PROFIsafe profile.
● With PROFINET IO, you use the familiar SIMATIC software tools, for example STEP 7 for
engineering and diagnostics at the field level and SIMOTION Scout for configuring motion
control applications.
● With IRT communication (IRT: Isochronous Real Time), part of the transfer time is
reserved for cyclic (deterministic) data transfer. This divides the communication cycle into
a deterministic part and an open part.
● You can run both IRT and TPC/IP communication over the same network at the same
time without one impairing the other.
● By supporting isochronous real-time communication, PROFINET provides the short and
deterministic update times decisive for motion control applications.
PROFINET CBA
● With PROFINET CBA (Component Based Automation), you can implement a modular
solution for your distributed automation system. With the component-based functionality
of PROFINET CBA, you divide the automation system into independent modules. You
implement the connections between the modules with the graphic engineering tool
SIMATIC iMap. This tool supports you when interconnecting modules right through to
complete plants and entire systems.
● PROFINET CBA supports cyclic and acyclic communication and with update times up to
10 ms is particularly suitable for data transmission between controllers.
● PROFIdrive is the functional interface between controllers and drives in PROFINET and
PROFIBUS. PROFIdrive is defined by the PROFIdrive profile of the PROFIBUS user
organization (PNO). The PROFIdrive profile specifies the device behavior and the
mechanism for accessing drive data for electrical drives, from a simple frequency
converter to high-performance servo controllers.
● PROFIsafe is the profile of PROFINET and PROFIBUS for safety-oriented
communication. PROFIsafe uses the conventional standard automation of PROFINET
and PROFIBUS and is certified for safety levels up to SIL 3 (Safety Integrated Level) of
the IEC 61508 and category 4 of EN954-1.
● PROFINET defines requirements regarding information integrity for automation systems
and supports the user with possible safety solutions specifically for an industrial
environment.
Teleservice PROFINET
Numeric
Control Controller
PC/PG
Feldgerät für Ex-Bereich Bedien- und
Beobachtungssysteme Link
Koppler Link
PROFINET
PROFIBUS PA PROFIBUS
Link
Machine Mobile
Vision Motor- Drives Access
Panel
manager RFID Point
Motion Control Feldgeräte System
Link Feldgeräte Systems Link
Link
Figure 1-4 Industrial Ethernet and PROFINET in the SIMATIC NET environment
Technical requirements
Communications networks are a central component of modern automation solutions.
Industrial networks have to fulfill special requirements, for example:
● Linking of automation systems, PCs as well as simple sensors, actuators and computers,
● Correct transfer of information and at the right time,
● Robust against electromagnetic interference, mechanical stress and pollution
● Flexible adaptation to the production requirements.
Industrial networks belong to the LANs (Local Area Networks) and allow communication
within a limited area.
Industrial networks fulfill the following communications functions:
● Process and field communication of the automation systems including sensors and
actuators,
● Data communication between automation systems,
● IT communication to integrate modern information technology.
Overview
Industrial Ethernet uses the protocol family TCP/IP or UDP/IP for data transfer. These are
essentially defined in the following RFCs (RFC: Request For Comment):
● RFC 768: UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
● RFC 791: IP (Internet Protocol)
● RFC 792: ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
● RFC 793: TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
However, Industrial Ethernet is unsuitable for cyclic data exchange due to its telegram
overhead. An optimized Layer-2 protocol conforming to IEEE 802.3 that makes real-time
communication on the basis of Industrial Ethernet possible is therefore used.
Other procedures
Other procedures used in the S5/S7 environment to meet real-time requirements are known
under the names "ISO (H1)" or "ISO on TCP/RFC 1006".
Overview
Fault-tolerant systems are designed to reduce production downtime. Availability can be
enhanced, for example, by means of component redundancy. Communication systems are
thus extended to automation systems.
Redundant systems in industrial Ethernet are characterized by the multiple (redundant)
presence of important automation components. When a redundant component fails,
processing of the program is not interrupted.
Redundancy is achieved by duplicating the part components such as CPU, network, CP, etc.
Monitoring and synchronization mechanisms ensure that if the active redundant connection
path fails, the previously passive (redundant) connection path takes over the communication
automatically. The connection itself remains established.
Company network
PC PC
Industrial Ethernet
S7-300
S7-400 S7-400
SCALANCE
X208
G_IK10_XX_10217
PG
The secondary rings (at the bottom) are connected redundantly with the main ring (at the
top): Of the two connections, one is inactive and is only activated when the other fails.
See also
SCALANCE X-400 (Page 293)
Switching mechanisms
Industrial Ethernet and therefore also PROFINET use switched Ethernet for data transfer.
The data traffic on the network is channeled and prioritized by dedicated devices known as
switches. A switch enables communication to take place simultaneously in both directions
(sending and receiving). This provides a network capacity of 200 Mbps, or twice the
bandwidth of Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps).
Switches of the SCALANCE X device family support real-time capability in the network with
two mechanisms: "Store and Forward" in general, and "Cut through" for "hard" real-time
requirements (IRT).
The advantage of the switching mechanism is that nodes or network areas that do not need
a particular frame are not subjected to any load by irrelevant data. The resulting free network
capacities can be used by further devices. In contrast to hub-based shared medium
solutions, with switching technology it is possible to communicate in different network
sections at the same time and so increase the effective bandwidth.
)UDPHD
)UDPHE )UDPHD )UDPHE
4XHXHIRUSRUW
$
6ZLWFK
Store and forward optimizes data traffic. With this function, the switch can check the formal
correctness of frames and prevent bad or corrupted frames being distributed any further over
the network.
Cut through
In the Cut Through process not the entire data package is stored temporarily in a buffer, but
is passed directly onto the target port as soon as the first 6 bytes (target address) have been
read. The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal.
The data is only stored temporarily using the store and forward mechanism when the section
between the target part and the port of the next switch is in use.
In PROFINET switches, cut through is implemented by using ERTEC-ASICs.
See also
Switches and switched LANs (Page 38)
Selection of media
Industrial Ethernet provides you with three different technologies to solve your automation
task:
● Electrical cabling: "Twisted pair"
● Fiber-optic cable: "Fiber optic"
● Wireless/radio
Configuration limits
For a basic application, the various media typically have the following configuration limits:
Table 1-1 Typical configuration limits for media with Industrial Ethernet
Guide to selection
The following table shows with of the three communications media is best suited to which
requirements:
EMC
Well-suited 1) Suitable for 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
2) Protection against subnet failure using redundant voltage supply
suitable 3) no effect in ring structure
4) depending on the network components used
not suitable 5) depending on the antenna used
Note
Cable assembly
FastConnect cables can be assembled particularly fast and simply on site. This means that
RJ-45 cabling technology, an existing standard, is also available in a version suitable for
industry.
Product overview
For a detailed overview of the available modules and accessories, refer to Part "B" of this
document, "Product overview". (Sections 3 -- 5)
Reference data
You will find reference data, installation instructions etc. for the individual modules in the
reference section "C" of this document. (Sections 6 -- 12)
See also
Part B: Active components and supported topologies (Page 103)
1.4.1 Basics
1.4.2 Firewalls
"Gatekeeper" function
Put simply, a firewall is a device or a software application inserted between the network and
the outside world as a "gatekeeper" to protect the network. The firewall represents the only
access to the local area network from outside and the entire data traffic crossing the
boundaries of the network is directed via the firewall. This means that the firewall can block
unwanted and potentially dangerous access from the outside. Various techniques are
available.
Packet filter
A packet filter inspects data packets entering or leaving the network, their sender and
receiver addresses and the "port", or service, to which the data packet will be transferred.
Such services might be E-mail, file transfer with FTP, database access, SSH for encrypted
transfer etc.
Filter rules stored in the firewall now block the access to certain addresses or certain
services. Firewalls can implement complex filter rules in which, for example, service "A" is
available only for IP addresses "B" and "C" but is not allowed for other communications
partners.
"Stateful Inspection"
"Stateful Inspection" goes a step further than the packet filter and takes into consideration
the "context" within the communication in addition to the addresses and ports.
In concrete terms, this means, for example, that Web pages sent be an external server to an
internal computer can only pass through the firewall if the internal computer has actually
requested this page.
Such techniques are, for example, relevant for preventing "Denial of Service" attacks (DoS)
in which an external intruder sends queries to the computer under attack from numerous
computers at the same time in the hope of overloading and paralyzing the network. Since,
however, the stateful inspection detects these illegitimate queries at the boundary of the
local area network, local traffic continues unaffected by the DoS attacks.
"Personal firewalls"
For professional applications, the firewalls normally used are separate devices. The
alternative to these devices are "personal firewalls" in the form of software running on the
target computers themselves.
Personal firewalls cannot, however, provide the same security as dedicated devices. Errors
in the operating system or badly programmed or configured personal firewalls allow an
attacker to avoid the "gatekeeper" filter function and to attack the target computer or target
network despite the firewall.
Security of VPNs
The term "private" relates primarily to the use of VPNs and not to the confidentiality of the
data: VPNs are not automatically secure since it is not essential for the data traffic to be
encrypted. If, however, suitable encryption techniques are used, communication via the VPN
is practically safe from eavesdropping.
See also
Encryption and data security (Page 42)
Functions of switches
Essentially, switches have the following functions:
● Connecting sublets
In contrast to hubs, switches connect several collision domains. This means that switches
can be used to set up networks with a far greater span and much higher number of nodes
than is possible with hubs. The distances achieved depend on the fiber-optic interfaces
used in the devices and the FOR fibers used. (For achievable spans, check the reference
section of this manual.)
● Containing load
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data traffic
remains local. In contrast to repeaters or hubs, which distribute data unfiltered to all ports
/ network nodes, switches operate selectively. Only data intended for nodes in other
sublets is switched from the input port to the appropriate output port of the switch. To
make this possible, a table assigning Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output ports is
created by the switch in a "teach-in" mode.
See also
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
WLAN
A WLAN is a "Wireless Local Area Network".
IWLAN
An IWLAN is an "Industrial WLAN", in other words, a wireless network "hardened" to cope
with the wireless complications of an industrial environment.
"Hardening" measures
Conventional wireless connections are not well suited to an industrial environment, on the
one hand because the production and automation level include numerous sources of EMI,
and on the other hand, automation has strict demands in terms of real-time requirements
and deterministic data transmission. The very nature of wireless networks also increases the
risk of eavesdropping or manipulation by unauthorized third parties. For this reason, wireless
networks need to be "hardened".
The "hardening" measures include, on the one hand robust and immune modules, and on
the other, the use of special protocols and security measures to ensure a deterministic
response and data protection.
See also
Configuring an IWLAN (Page 66)
Standardization of WLANs
IEEE
The acronym "IEEE" stands for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, an
organization that has taken on the task of developing, publishing and promoting electronic
and electrotechnical standards and that can be compared in some ways with DIN.
● The MAC address is worked into the key (in other words, unique hardware identification)
of the sender making it more difficult to falsify the sender of the message.
MAC filter
MAC addresses ("Media Access Control A.") are codes with which hardware elements (for
example network cards, modules, motherboards) can be uniquely identified worldwide.
The addresses are normally encoded in 6 bytes (48 bits) and hardwired in the relevant
components; on request, the components identify themselves by returning their MAC
address.
Filter tables with MAC addresses can be created in network management that permit or
forbid access for certain addresses. This allows simple although comparatively unsecured
access protection for the network to be implemented.
Manipulation of MAC addresses (spoofing) cannot be excluded which means that MAC filters
only provide adequate security for a network in conjunction with other measures.
selected at random but according to priority. With this strategy, communication remains
deterministic.
See also
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices (Page 89)
Note
Please note the following:
You will find further use cases and information on configuration of various network topologies
in Part "B" in the descriptions of the individual components.
Products
The following components and cables are used in a 100 Mbps switched LAN:
● Components
– SCALANCE X switches
– OSM/ESM
● Cables
– Twisted-pair cable
– TP Cord
See also
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 105)
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM) (Page 171)
Components for electrical networks (Page 186)
100BASE-TX
The twisted pair interfaces of the SCALANCE X products comply with the
IEEE 802.3u: 100BASE-TX standard. Depending on the particular variant, the switches have
one or more RJ-45 or M12 jacks.
Cabling structure Cable type Max. length Max. total of the patch
cables (TP cord)
In one piece ITP standard 2x2 100 m -
(with D-sub connectors)
In one piece IE FC standard cable GP 100 m -
(without using patch IE FC flexible cable GP 85 m -
cable) IE FC torsion cable GP 55 m -
IE FC trailing cable GP 85 m -
IE FC trailing cable 85 m -
IE FC marine cable 85 m -
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 85 m -
Structured IE FC standard cable GP 90 m 10 m
(with patch cable and IE FC flexible cable GP 75 m 10 m
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 or IE FC torsion cable GP 45 m 10 m
IE FC RJ-45 Modular
IE FC trailing cable GP 75 m 10 m
Outlet)
IE FC trailing cable 75 m 10 m
IE FC marine cable 75 m 10 m
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 75 m 10 m
Products
The following components and cables are used in an optical 100 Mbps switched LAN:
● Components
– SCALANCE X products with FO interfaces
– OSM (I)TPnn (switches with multimode glass fibre-optic cables) or OSM (I)TPnn-LD
(switches with single mode glass fibre optic cables)
● Cables
– Multimode glass fiber-optic cable type 50/125 µm
– Single mode glass fiber-optic cable type 10/125 µm
– Twisted-pair cable, TP Cord
See also
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 105)
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM) (Page 171)
Components for optical networks (Page 201)
Table 2-2 Max. length of a link with multimode FO cables between two switches:
Table 2-3 Max. length of a link with single mode FO cables between two suitable equipped
switches:
Note
Single mode glass fiberoptic cables with fiber type 10/125 are available in customized
lengths. You will find contacts in the "Support and training" section of this manual.
range can be used as for 100BASE-FX. The range between two points is 750 m. As long as
this range is not exceeded, it is possible to upgrade from 100 Mbps Ethernet to 1
Gbps Ethernet over existing installed cable of this type without needing to install new cables.
The version for single mode glass fibers is 1000BASE-LX. A wavelength of 1300 nm is used
here. A single mode glass fiber-optic cable 10/125 µm may be up to 10,000 m long.
In terms of the FO link length that can be included, the dependencies are basically the same
as for 100 Mbps Ethernet.
Table 2-4 Maximum link length with multimode glass fiber-optic cables with 1 Gbps Ethernet:
See also
Components for optical networks (Page 201)
Figure 2-1 Web Based Management based on the example of configuring a W-788 access point
Advantages
● Access is possible from any PC with a Web browser installed on it and with an Ethernet
connection to the target device. (With SCALANCE W devices, this connection can also
be over a wireless network.)
● The installation of special software is not necessary and no specialist knowledge is
required to navigate through and work with WBM.
● Access is, of course, password protected.
For more detailed information on the functions of the WBM, refer to the operating instructions
of the individual devices.
Topologies
"Topology" means the spatial arrangement and interconnection of the nodes of a wired
network.
Which topology is preferable depends on the position of the nodes relative to each other and
what is required of the network. If it is required that the network remains working in the event
of a failure, a ring structure is an advantage in which each node can reach the others over
both branches of the ring. A linear bus topology in which the nodes follow on from each other
like a chain is, on the other hand, more adversely affected by the failure of a component or a
cable break which causes the network to break up into separate sections.
In many cases, networks do not have a "pure" topology but rather a hybrid configuration; or
the full network consists of several subnets with different topologies.
Switch Switch
SCALANCE Terminal bus 1 Gbit/s SCALANCE
X414-3E X414-3E
OS Server
(Redundant)
Switch Switch
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X414-3E X414-3E
Switch Switch
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X414-3E X414-3E
Ring structure
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
Switching cabinet
Switch S7-300
SCALANCE with CP 343-1
X108 IE FC
Outlet
CP 1512
G H I J K L
s M N O P Q R
SIMATIC PANEL PC S T U
POWER TEMP
7 8 9
SCALANCE
A B C D E F V W X
G H I J K L 4 5 6
Y Z A
M N O P Q R 1 2 3
S T U
. 0 +/-
7 8 9
V W X
4 5 6 INS
Y Z A
1 2 3 DEL
. 0 +/- ESC
TAB
INS
X208
HELP ACK
DEL
ESC
10/100 Mbit/s
TAB SHIFT FN CTRL ALT ENTER
HELP ACK
RJ45
Switching cabinet Plug X208
Switch
SCALANCE
X108 IE FC
Outlet
RJ45
IE TP Cord 0 1
10/100 Mbit/s
PROFIBUS
SIMATIC FC Standard Cable
ET 200X
Field PG
with
CP 1512
s
SIMATIC PANEL PC
POWER TEMP
A B C D E F
G H I J K L
M N O P Q R
S T U
7 8 9
V W X
4 5 6
Y Z A
1 2 3
. 0 +/-
INS
DEL
ESC
TAB
HELP ACK
Figure 2-2 Selection of various network topologies (schematic): Ring (top center), star (bottom left) and linear bus
(bottom right)
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Configuring an IWLAN (Page 66)
Linear bus
The linear bus is the simplest network structure. It is characterized by a network backbone to
which the individual nodes are connected directly or over a branch (only one node is
permitted per branch).
● The advantage of the linear bus topology is its simple setup and low hardware
investment. It is suitable, for example, for networking of rigidly linked machines over a
wide area as found in assembly lines.
● The disadvantage of the linear bus topology is the inefficient use of resources and the
lack of redundancy: A break on the cable at any point cannot be bridged. Connecting the
ends of the linear bus, on the other hand, creates a ring with which these disadvantages
can be avoided.
SCALANCE
Control & Monitoring
SIMATIC S7-300 X101-1POF
with CP 343-1 media converter ET 200pro
POF FO
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
Figure 2-3 Linear bus network topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet
A further restriction for networks with a linear bus structure is the physical arrangement of
the network nodes. Depending on their position, the backbone may need take long detours
which may, in turn, lead to problems with frame delay times.
In a linear network topology, the network components such as switches typically have only
one or few connection points for network nodes. Linear bus structures can also be created
with devices with two integrated network interfaces.
S7-300
with CP 343-1
Switching cabinet
10/100 Mbit/s
RJ45 X104-2 X104-2 X104-2
Plug
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
G_IK10_XX_10090
PROFIBUS
electric linear topology
optical linear topology ET 200X FC Standard Cable
See also
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged (Page 114)
Optical linear structure (Page 61)
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 260)
"Star"
The difference between the star topology and linear bus topology is that one switch functions
as the central node from which the spokes branch off to the individual nodes. The individual
nodes of the network therefore have separate point-to-point links with the active network
component (i.e. with the switch).
The immediate effect is that the messages only run via the spokes between sender and
recipient, in other words network performance improves significantly because several nodes
can communicate at the same time.
In practice, these may be a mixture of fiber-optic and twisted-pair cables depending on what
is required of the individual links. Typical applications are Ethernet office networking or the
networking of production cells in manufacturing with Industrial Ethernet.
Field PG with
CP 7515
G_IK10_XX_10056
Figure 2-5 Star topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with a gateway to Industrial Wireless LAN
● The use of a switch optimizes data throughput in the network. Messages are transferred
only on the star segments between sender and recipient and the segments of the other
nodes remain unaffected by them. If a node fails, the communication between the other
network nodes remains intact.
● Compared with ring or linear bus structures, however, the investment in cabling increases
considerably due to the long distances back to the star center.
Typical use cases for star networks are switching cubicles, individual machines or
manufacturing cells.
PC with
CP 1613 A2
SCALANCE
X005
G_IK10_XX_30039
IPC with Panel PC
CP 1613 A2
The number and technology of the connections to the end nodes (electrical/optical) depends
on the number of relevant ports on the switch: In the example above, the SCALANCE X005
can support five 10/100 Mbps cables with RJ-45 connectors and no fiber-optic connections.
The cable lengths listed in the linear bus topology example apply; with an FC TP Standard
Cable, the end nodes can be installed up to 100 m from the switch.
Switching cabinet
S7-400 with
CP 443-1 Advanced
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
MP 370
S7-300 with CP 343-1
10/100 Mbit/s
SIMATIC Field PG
G_IK10_XX_10205
S7-400 S7-300 MP 370 IPC with
with CP 443-1 with CP 343-1 CP 1613 A2
More complex network structures can be set up by using switches with a higher number of
ports. (In the example above, a SCALANCE X124 with 24 electrical ports.) In terms of the
numbers of nodes and the physical span of the network, this is practicable only up to a
certain limit.
If more extensive networks need to be configured, it is advisable to use more switches and
the extra subnets that result.
Tree structure
If several start networks, for example manufacturing cells, need to be interconnected in a
network, a tree-shaped network results.
See also
Entry level SCALANCE X005 (Page 109)
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged (Page 114)
"Redundant rings"
The simple ring topology (Page 52) results from connecting the two ends of an active linear
bus topology to form a physical ring. A special redundancy mechanism ensures that the
redundant ring structure (Page 62) remains a logical bus in normal situations and prevents
frames from circulating. If a section of the ring fails, the mechanism quickly makes a
substitute path available in ring: The message now travels the long way round via the intact
network section instead of over the direct interrupted path and reaches its recipient via this
detour. The network does not break down into two segments.
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X414-3E X414-3E
Industrial S7-200
Ethernet SCALANCE
X308-2 Non-Siemens
1000
Mbit/s device
Gigabit-
Server
SCALANCE
X408-2 10/100
Mbit/s
S7-300
S7-400
G_IK10_XX_10202
H-System H-System
Figure 2-8 Ring topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with glass fiber-optic cables
● The effects of a network component being disrupted are restricted to the failed
component and to the end devices connected to it. If a ring section is interrupted, for
example by a cable break, communication continues without any disruption.
The reconfiguration time is faster here than in the office world and meets the requirements of
the automation world.
S7-400
Operator Station PC
S7-400
S7-300
Twisted Pair
S7-300
PC
Switch
SCALANCE X208
PC
S7-400
PC
S7-400 S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10101
S7-400
Figure 2-9 SCALANCE X: Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the electrical ring
The SCALANCE switch or OSM / ESM operating in the redundancy manager mode monitors
the connected linear bus over its ring ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an
interruption on the connected bus; in other words, it restores a functioning line over this
substitute path. Reconfiguration takes place within 0.3 seconds. As soon as the problem has
been eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other words, the ring ports in the
redundancy manager are once again disconnected from each other.
See also
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 229)
Fiber Optic
See also
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no components (for
example switches from other vendors) other than ring-compliant SCALANCE X switches /
OSMs are used in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy manager mode.
PC
S7-400
ET 200S
Switch ET 200S
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
PC
Fiber
Fiber Optic
Optic S7-400
Switch
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
S7-300
IPC
S7-300
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_10102
Figure 2-11 Redundant ring structure with optical ring, example with SCALANCE X-202IRT
The interconnected switches in this ring do not need to be connected only with FO cables or
only with electrical cables. A mixed electrical and optical ring is also permitted.
S7-400
Operator Station
S7-400
S7-300
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X400 IRT
PC
S7-400
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X206-1 X206-1
Industrial Ethernet
S7-300
IPC
SCALANCE X208
PC
S7-400
IPC
S7-400 S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10113
Maximum cable length for 100 Mbit/s:
electrical ring circuit: 100 m
optical ring circuit S7-400
(multimode): 3000 m
See also
SCALANCE X-100 media converters (Page 116)
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 128)
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
OSM/ESM and ELS (Page 170)
General
SCALANCE X switches support not only ring redundancy within a ring but also redundant
linking of several rings or open network segments (linear bus). In the redundant link, two
rings are connected together over two Ethernet connections. This is achieved by configuring
a master/slave device pair in one ring so that the devices monitor each other and, in the
event of a fault, redirect the data traffic from the normally used master Ethernet connection
to the substitute (slave) Ethernet connection.
Standby redundancy
Operator Operator
Station Stations
S7-300
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X204IRT X208
100
Mbit/s
S7-300 S7-200
SCALANCE
X208
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X202-2IRT X202-2IRT
100
Mbit/s
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X204-2 X202-2IRT
IPC
S7-400
G_IK10_XX_10173
S7-300
Figure 2-13 Example of redundant linking of two SCALANCE X-200 IRT rings
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two devices must be configured as standby
redundancy switches within a network segment. Here, network segments are rings with a
redundancy manager (RM, in the example, the SCALANCE X202-2IRT switches). Instead of
rings, network segments might also be linear.
The two X202 devices connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other
to synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there
are no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this
link fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as
long as the problem persists.
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access Point
Access Point SCALANCE
SCALANCE W788-1RR
W788-1RR
IWLAN RCoax Cable
IWLAN/
Client Module PB Link
SCALANCE PN IO
W747-1RR ET 200S PROFIBUS
G_IK10_XX_30115
ET 200pro ET 200S
Figure 2-14 Simple WLAN structure with two access points/wireless cells, RCoax cable and IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
gateway
Here, access points take over the role of switches. End nodes are connected to the network
by activating clients. Larger networks can be achieved by setting up several wireless cells
each under the control of an access point. The connection between individual cells is also
via access points.
The cells have the function of subnets between which the mobile nodes can move.
("Roaming")
See also
Structuring wireless networks (Page 67)
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
Various WLAN accessories (Page 214)
IWLAN RCoax Cable (leaky feeder cable) (Page 213)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation (Page 77)
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control (Page 75)
Ad hoc networks
If wireless networks are set up without any further structuring, they are known as ad hoc
networks.
In such networks, each node can contact any other node at any time. The achievable data
rate sinks quickly because every active sender blocks all others. At the same time, there are
serious security and reliability problems because no control entity is controlling the data
traffic.
Ad hoc networks can only operated according to the 802.11 "b" standard.
For reasons of data security, transmission reliability and optimum performance, it is not
advisable to operate an industrial wireless network as an ad hoc network. With ad hoc
networks, protection against unauthorized intrusion and eavesdropping is difficult while the
uncoordinated data traffic is not ideal for optimum performance. Response time and data
rates cannot be guaranteed.
As an alternative, wireless networks can be configured in "infrastructure mode".
In this case, a central access point functions like a switch receiving the frames from the
individual nodes (clients) and forwarding them.
Figure 2-15 Wireless network in standalone mode Normally, SCALANCE W clients take the place of PROFIBUS links.
The actual users of the network, CPUs, HMI devices etc. are also connected over wired
Ethernet with the second interface of the client.
The setting up of a network with more than one cell may be necessary due to the span
involved: It is practically impossible to predict the range that can be covered by an access
point. (This is influenced by shadowing and reflections caused by stationary or mobile
objects and interference from other transmitters.) In closed rooms, omnidirectional antennas
typically cover distances between 30 m and 100 m.
Industrial Industrial
Ethernet Ethernet
Access Point
Access Point Access Point
SCALANCE
SCALANCE SCALANCE
W788-1PRO S7-400
W788-2PRO W788-2PRO
S7-200
SIMATIC S5
ET 200S IE Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
Field PG/
Notebook
with CP 7515
IE Client Module
SCALANCE PROFIBUS
W746-1PRO
G_IK10_XX_30017
Automated guided Wireless SPS
vehicle systems Mobile diagnosis and service Separate radio network
In the illustration above, the access points are interconnected by wired Industrial Ethernet.
Each access point spreads a wireless cell (light shaded area) within which it communicates
with its (stationary) clients. Communication between cells is handled over Industrial Ethernet.
If a network with several cells is necessary, the APs have to communicate with each other
over a separate channel. To allow this, all W-780 access points have a wired Ethernet
interface; the W788-1PRO and W788-2PRO access points also have a second wireless
interface that serves the same purpose. This means that the connection between the cells
can be established over cable or over wireless.
Communication between a client located in cell "A" and a client in cell "B" is always handled
via the APs in cells "A" and "B" even if the two clients are theoretically within each other's
range.
S7-400
SIMATIC HMI
G_IK10_XX_30004
Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS)
The figure above shows how a moving node (in this case an automated guided vehicle
system) is handed over between two wireless cells: The access point of the first cell in which
the AGVS is originally located hands over the router function of the AGVS when this reaches
the boundary between its own cell and the cell of the next access point. As of this point, the
second access point is responsible for managing the client AGVS.
This handover typically takes several hundred milliseconds; and this time is too long for
many industrial applications. To speed up the handover, "rapid roaming" with the iPCF
method ("industrial Point Coordination Function") is used to reduce the interruption to a
length of time acceptable for industrial requirements. SCALANCE W access points and
clients with the supplement "RR" in the device name have the rapid roaming function that
reduces the interruption to only a few milliseconds.
Complex structures
Depending on the requirements of the automation task and the performance of the devices,
even more complex structures are possible:
● Multichannel configuration: Adjacent wireless cells communicate on different frequencies.
This ensures that nodes in cell "A" cannot disrupt cell "B" and that communication can
continue reliably.
● Wireless Distribution System ("WDS"): An infrastructure network in which the connection
between the cells (the backbone) is not over cable but over a second wireless interface of
the access point.
● Redundant Wireless LAN ("RWLAN"): In this case, there are two frequencies available for
the backbone. If one of these frequencies is disrupted, the APs can change to the other
frequency. This means that the availability and reliability of the network is retained even
in a disrupted environment.
Radio cell
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2RR
RCoax Cable
Antenna
ANT792-4DN
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
Suspension
Suspension
Suspension
Suspension
Suspension
Field PG/Notebook
gear 1
gear 2
gear 3
gear 4
gear 5
G_IK10_XX_30007
Figure 2-18 Function of the RCoax leaky feeder cable
The distance between the end node and the leaky feeder cable can be up to approx. 1 m.
Several leaky feeder cable elements can be combined up to a total length of approx. 100 m.
They create individual antenna wireless cells and the node roams between them. Refer to
IWLAN application example for a use case. Power screwdriver control.
SCALANCE
Industrial Ethernet PROFIBUS
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
PROFIBUS
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
Industrial Ethernet
IWLAN RCoax Cable
IWLAN/PB PROFIBUS
G_IK10_XX_30037
Link PN IO
Refer to Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation (Page 77) for a use
case.
See also
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control (Page 75)
SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 139)
Components for wireless networks (Page 209)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
RCoax leaky feeder cable (Page 519)
Task
An optimum solution is required for a filling machine with moving bottles. The valves on the
moving part of the filling machine need to open and close in real-time.
The wired solution used up to now had too many downtimes because the slip ring contacts
were subject to wear and tear and the communication system suffered from a lot of
disruptions.
Solution
Alternative wireless solutions such as the use of infrared over the AS-Interface and
PROFIBUS did not match up to the required performance and reliability. The final decision is
a PROFINET solution with IO communication.
A SIMATIC ET 200S is installed as the control unit on the moving parts of the filling machine
along with a SCALANCE W788-1RR access point and a SCALANCE
W747-1RR as client module to control the fast opening and closing of the valves.
'DWD$FFHVV
The wireless PROFINET communication allows the common use of real-time and TCP/IP-
based communication on one cable and permits the integration of controller, distributed I/O
and other Ethernet-based devices in one communications structure. The cyclic transfer of I/O
data along with the process image of the corresponding controller makes for precise and
very fast opening and closing of the valves.
With the wireless access to the moving parts of the machine, there is no longer any wear
and tear costing long downtimes and high costs.
This interface can, in future, also be used for service making programming much simpler.
Benefits
● Costs saved by reduction of the downtimes with reliable communication in real time and
savings on slip rings
● Significant improvement in performance
● Protection of investment by integrating PROFIBUS field devices in an IWLAN wireless
network
● Cost-effective solution even compared with AS-Interface or PROFIBUS
● Option of wireless programming for service purposes
● Future-proof solution due to the use of the PROFINET standard and due to the option of
integrating further applications such as a weighing system with SIWAREX
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
Task
The aim is to reduce the number of power screwdrivers in motor vehicle assembly. The
previous solution has a power screwdriver for each cycle and every bar code acquisition.
Since the wired solution with slip rings required maintenance, a reliable wireless
communications solution is intended to increase efficiency and reduce tooling times.
The products should be suitable for industry and be available worldwide. Investment should
be protected by components that will be available in the long term.
S7-300 with
CP 343-1
Access Point
Segment 1
Power screwdriver
control
Switch
Operator control
and monitoring
Suspension
Figure 2-21 IWLAN: System solution for screwdriver controller with RCoax cable and SCALANCE
W747-1RR
Solution
To set up the wireless data transmission, the silicon-free leaky feeder cable IWLAN RCoax
cable will be used along the coding bar. This generates a defined, cone-shaped and reliable
RF field and can be moved easily. The RCoax cable is therefore ideal for use in
environments in which wireless is otherwise difficult and whenever rail-guided vehicles are
involved.
For the feed-in stations for the RCoax Cable, IWLAN access points SCALANCE W788-1RR
to IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz) with data rates up to 54 Mbps will be used. The client module
SCALANCE W747-1RR will be installed as the mobile node. This allows the same mobile
unit to be used for all applications so that a mobile power screwdriver can be used for
several cycles.
With this implementation with SCALANCE W747-1RR, there is also the option of using up to
eight end devices
Benefits
● Lower investment costs due to the savings on power screwdrivers
● Reduction of maintenance costs and downtimes with a reliable wireless and therefore
non-wearing data transmission to mobile communications partners
● Reduction of downtimes in the event of faults by using the C-PLUG (configuration plug);
devices can be replaced without a programming device and without needing specialist
personnel
● Reduction of operator activity, for example scanning, cycle transfer, travel time
● Changing models is straightforward and depends only on materials logistics
● Integration of further applications for quality control is possible
● Full screwdriver data can be loaded over the IWLAN link
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 223)
Figure 2-22 Harbor installation as an example of wireless networks in hostile climatic conditions
The SCALANCE W-786 is only an access point but it can nevertheless be configured as a
client module using Web-based management.
If SCALANCE W-786 devices are configured as client modules, then depending on the
selected variant, a maximum of one wireless module is available as client.
See also
SCALANCE W-786 (Page 145)
Task
In a brick works, during production the green bricks are transported to the drying chamber by
a trolley or shuttle conveyor. The shuttle conveyor not only runs back and forth between the
two stations, but also fulfills other tasks. When the shuttle conveyor arrives, the doors or the
drying chamber open or close automatically.
The original solution used a trailing cable for communication between the conveyor and the
plant control, however this turned out to require too much maintenance. The plant then
converted to wireless PROFIBUS modems:
The results were, however, not satisfactory. The maintenance was no longer required but
communication was liable to disruption and was interrupted time and again for short periods.
The reason turned out to be that the cycle time and transmission rate via wireless
PROFIBUS were inadequate to meet the requirements of the plant.
Solution
The system was replaced by a PROFINET IWLAN. Instead of the wireless PROFIBUS
modem, an IWLAN/PB Link PN/IO took over communication between the ET 200M head
modules, the HMI operator station and the S7 plant controller that in turn communicate over
SCALANCE W access points or clients.
This solution combines PROFINET IO and wireless industrial technology. The plant therefore
has real-time PROFINET communication based on Ethernet with a high data rate and is
transparent to the PROFIBUS network.
Benefits
● Maintenance-free communications medium (no more moving parts),
● Transparent network with wireless PROFINET/PROFIBUS gateway,
● More user friendliness with wireless PCs for diagnostics, process visualization etc.,
● High data rate, reliable communication,
● Elimination of downtimes due to disruptions,
● Operating costs, particularly for maintenance, significantly lower,
● Increased productivity,
● Installation of a flexible, expandable system with system reserves.
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
2.6.2.1 Protection of the production network when networking with the office network
Task
● The production network needs to be protected from unauthorized attacks from the office
network and the automation cells from mutual influence.
● Total integration from the management level to field level should be possible to allow
comprehensive diagnostics for field devices and network components.
● Cells with predominantly the same structure (same private IP addresses) should be
protected from illegal access.
– A Syslog server should log all attacks, for example by hackers, or overload.
– Process data such as numbers produced, fabrication numbers, type designations
should be logged.
● The configuration should be simple since personnel without special training in security will
be used for commissioning and service.
Solution
Remote
access
Printer Office PC ROBCAD Test Process Virus File Syslog Print DHCP
PC systems data protection server server server DNS
recording server archive server
Factory network
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE X414-3E SCALANCE X414-3E
with layer 3-functions with layer 3-functions
(IP routing) (IP routing)
controller controller
The use of SCALANCE S602 as a firewall serves to filter data packets and to allow
communication connections according to the firewall rules. Incoming and outgoing
communication can be filtered as well as IP and MAC addresses or communications
protocols (ports). It is also possible to set an overload limit.
The firewall integrated in the security modules can be configured so that only a certain
number of stations are permitted access.
The logging functionality allows access monitoring and logs attacks and attempted access to
allow preventive measures to be taken.
An IP address conversion is necessary for effective protection of the established cells. The
SCALANCE S602 security modules with NAT/NAPT functionality are used to achieve this.
Syslog information such as process data is automatically sent to the Syslog server.
This means that the production network is protected effectively and reliably from
unauthorized access from the office network, but that the office network is also protected
from influence from the production network.
Benefits
● Protecting the plant from unauthorized attacks and communication overload by using
SCALANCE S
● Effective protection from mutual influence between production and office network
● Continuous monitoring of access to the production network
● Cost saving by saving on public IP addresses
● Simple maintenance and diagnostics, since all protected cells can be set up identically.
Note
The SCALANCE S602 security modules do not work in conjunction with the SOFTNET
security client.
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
Task
● Automation systems should be protected within the automation cell even without their
own security functionality.
● Existing network settings such as topology, addresses or protocols used should remain
unchanged by implementing security.
● Mechanisms for authentication and data encryption should be used to prevent falsification
of IP addresses or manipulation and espionage
Solution
Visualization with
WinCC flexible Runtime
Field PG
STEP 7
configuration,
diagnosis
SCALANCE SCALANCE
S612 S612
Transfer of
productivity data
Switch via VPN
SCALANCE
X208 5
5
G_IK10_XX_10071
Automation cell 1 Automation cell 2
secure network
insecure network
VPNs (Virtual Private Networks) allow the secure authentication of communication nodes
and the encryption of data transmission.
The SCALANCE S security modules are used to protect automation networks and for the
secure exchange of data between automation systems.
They only allow communication between authenticated and authorized devices. This protects
from operator errors, prevents unauthorized access and avoids disruptions and
communication overload.
The data transmission is also encrypted providing protection from espionage and
manipulation.
The SOFTNET security client software is used to set up secure VPN connections from
PGs/PCs with network segments. This allows secure VPN client access by PCs/notebooks
to automation systems or cells protected by SCALANCE S.
Benefits
● Enhanced protection of the plant from unauthorized access, manipulation, espionage and
communication overload by the SOFTNET security client using VPN technology with
SCALANCE S
● Simple configuration of security mechanisms is possible without specialist knowledge
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
Task
● Mobile access for commissioning, maintenance and service of field devices, control
technology and mobile operator control and monitoring should only be possible for
authorized personnel.
● Personnel should be able to move around freely and have access within the RF field to
data from the machine room and control components.
● This should minimize downtimes and personnel requirements.
● It should be possible to use the components both in the indoor and outdoor areas.
● The configuration of restricted access should be as simple as possible to set since the
plant will only be operated by automation technicians.
Industrial Ethernet
Security Module Security Module Security Module
SCALANCE S SCALANCE S SCALANCE S
G_IK10_XX_10083
Figure 2-27 Secure access to automation cells protected by SCALANCE S with SOFTNET security client
Solution
To achieve the optimum coverage with the RF field, a preliminary illumination is performed
and the RF field planned.
A W788-1PRO access point is used to illuminate the space involved. With its robust IP65
metal housing, it can be used both indoors and outdoors. Thanks to the roaming function of
Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN), the nodes can move freely in the wireless network.
A field PG is used as the mobile end device.
Use the SCALANCE S security modules and the SOFTNET Security Client software
achieves secure authentication of the communications nodes and encryption of the data
transmission through the VPN tunnel, operator errors and unauthorized access are
prevented as well as espionage and manipulation.
Benefits
● Mobile communication is protected from unauthorized access, manipulation, espionage
and communications overload
● Simple integration of other mobile nodes even in existing automation systems
● Savings in resources for service and maintenance
● Simple configuration of the security mechanisms without specialist knowledge
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
Mesh networks
In a mesh network, every network node is connected to one or more of the other nodes.
Information is passed from node to node until it reaches its destination. If every node is
connected to every other node, this is known as a fully connected network.
● Mesh networks are normally self-healing: If a node or a connection is blocked, the
network can reconfigure itself around the problem. The data is redirected and the network
is then operational again.
● The reconfiguration time can, however, be a problem for industrial applications.
The concept of mesh networks can be used both for wired and wireless networks. Powerful
switches such as the SCALANCE X-300 and X-400 devices are capable of setting up and
controlling mesh networks. These topologies are used in particular when setting up networks
over large areas and at the transition to enterprise networks.
With a SCALANCE X-400, the simultaneous use of STP and ring redundancy is not possible.
A SCALANCE X-400 cannot use more than one method at one time. If (R)STP is disabled, a
SCALANCE X-400 works in the (R)STP listening mode. In this mode, the switch forwards
(R)STP configuration frames transparently even when (R)STP is disabled for it. If it
recognizes a topology change frame, it reduces the aging time for a limited period or deletes
the address table so that the node list is updated more quickly.
Switch Switch
Ethernet
Switch Switch
SCALANCE
X-400
Industrial 100/1000
Ethernet Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X-400
G_IK10_XX_10066
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
SCALANCE X is the current family of Industrial Ethernet switches from SIMATIC NET. It is
made up of various product lines each complementing the other that are also available for
PROFINET applications and are tailored to specific automation tasks.
Switched network
The transmission media used between the switches are fiber-optic cables (optical) or
twisted-pair cables (electrical). End devices or network segments are connected over
twisted-pair cable.
The key to market success tomorrow is the availability of information at any location and at
any time. Processes can be much more efficiently designed using mobile devices networked
over standardized and available wireless networks. The advantage of wireless solutions is
primarily the simple and flexible accessibility of mobile nodes.
Wireless infrastructure
In contrast to copper and fiber-optic cables, wireless transmission makes use of radio waves.
The propagation characteristics of the electromagnetic waves can differ considerably and
depend on the spatial environment and the installed wireless infrastructure.
To achieve better reception, SIMATIC NET modules use techniques such as antenna
diversity, top-quality receivers and fault-tolerant modulation techniques to improve signal
quality and to prevent the wireless traffic being interrupted. To ensure reliable wireless links,
it is even possible to activate data reservation on the access points to achieve a reliability
similar to that of wired links.
Industrial mobile communication uses the various wireless networks, for example WLAN,
GSM or GPRS together in harmony. First and foremost, this relates to the various frequency
ranges for different applications, the restrictions regarding the maximum transmit power and
the selection of specific transmission techniques.
Wireless LAN.
IEEE 802.11
depending on surroundings
GSM, HSCSD,
GPRS, UMTS
up to
approx. from approx. 30 m to approx. 300 m from 300 m
10 m
G_IK_XX_30604
Personal Area Local Area Wide Area
Network (PAN) Network (LAN) Network (WAN)
Reliability
Using redundancy mechanisms and packet repetitions, the SCALANCE W access points
create a reliable wireless link that can also resist the interference found in the industrial
sector.
The reservation of the data rate makes wireless traffic plannable and prevents delays or
even production downtimes when accessing data.
The C-PLUG exchangeable medium stores project engineering and configuration data
making it possible to replace devices quickly and without specially trained personnel. This
minimizes downtimes and saves training costs.
With "rapid roaming", mobile nodes can be handed over quickly from one RF field to the next
avoiding any interruption in PROFINET IO communication. Several PROFINET IO devices
can also be operated simultaneously over wireless links in real time.
Client 1
Client 2
Client 3
Client 4
Client 5
Client 6
Nodes with Nodes 1,2 and 3 have predictive Node 4 can "only" access the
G_IK10_XX_10181
critical data access to the radio channel, radio channel in the third cycle
controlled by SCALANCE W-780
The functionality of all access points can be reduced so that they can also be used purely as
clients; a client cannot, however, be upgraded to become an access point.
See also
SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 139)
PC
SINAUT ST7sc/cc
Switch SCALANCE X-400 Switch SCALANCE X414-3E
Automation network
PROFINET PROFINET
Secure access (VPN tunnel)
G_IK10_XX_30010
Panel
PC Robot cells Robot cell
Control & Monitoring Automation cell
● Alternatively or additionally with VPN (Virtual Private Network) for secure authentication
of the communications nodes and encryption of the data transmission
● SOFTNET Security Client for secure access from PCs/notebooks to automation systems
protected by SCALANCE S (in bridge mode).
PC/PG withSOFTNET
for Industrial Ethernet
Industrial
Ethernet S7-400 with
CP 343-1
S7-200
with CP 243-1
SCALANCE S models
● SCALANCE S602
– Protects with the stateful inspection firewall, address translation (NAT/NAPT), DHCP
server and Syslog.
● SCALANCE S612
– Protects with stateful inspection firewall
– Up to 64 VPN tunnels simultaneously with up to 32 devices
● SCALANCE S613
– Protects with stateful inspection firewall
– Up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously with up to 64 devices
– Expanded temperature range from -- 20 °C to + 70 °C
Advantages of SCALANCE S
Security modules of the SCALANCE S family are intended specifically for use in automation
engineering but nevertheless fit in seamlessly with the security structures of the office and IT
world. They provide security and meet the special requirements of automation engineering,
such as simple upgrading of existing plants, simple installation and minimized downtimes in
the event of faults.
Various security measures can be combined depending on the security requirements.
See also
Part C: SCALANCE S security components (Page 383)
When installing cables, problems are often encountered stripping the cables, there are too
many connector bits to get lost, wires are incorrectly connected or mistakes are made during
assembly. To avoid this, SCALANCE devices are designed for the use of the fast assembly
system FastConnect (FC).
Components
The FastConnect system covers FC cables, preset stripping tools and specially developed
connectors and includes the following:
● Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables (IE FC Cable 2x2) specially designed for fast
assembly (PROFINET-compliant, silicone free, halogen free, UL and CAT5e certified) for
a variety of applications as FC TP Standard Cable, FC TP Flexible Cable, FC TP Trailing
Cable and FC TP Marine Cable, and with FRNC jacket.
● Convenient stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool for Industrial Ethernet cables,
with which the outer jacket and braid shield can be removed to the perfect length in one
step.
● Cables prepared in this way are connected to the FastConnect using the insulation
piercing technique.
● Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45 Plugs with 90°, 145° and 180° cable outlet (PROFINET-
compliant) or IE FC Modular Outlet for gigabit cabling
See also
Components for electrical networks (Page 186)
Autocrossover function
All SCALANCE devices have an integrated MDI/MDIX autocrossover function on their
electrical ports making it possible to use straight-through cables. This prevents malfunctions
resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation much easier for
the user.
Autonegotiation
All SCALANCE devices also have the autonegotiation function. Autonegotiation means the
automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite end. Using autonegotiation,
repeaters or end devices can detect the functionality available at the port of a partner device
allowing automatic configuration of different types of device. With autonegotiation, two
components connected to a link segment can exchange parameters and set themselves to
match the supported communication functionality.
The SCALANCE devices are therefore plug-and-play devices that require no settings when
they are put into operation.
Please note that devices not supporting autonegotiation must be set to 100 Mbps/ half
duplex or 10 Mbps half duplex.
Fault mask
On all SCALANCE devices with a button on the front panel, it is possible to set a specific
configuration as the desired status (good status). Deviations from this setting occurring
during operation are treated as errors.
Monitored error statuses include, for example, the status of the power supply or link down to
a communications partner, to which the SCALANCE device reacts with a fault LED and by
opening the signaling contact.
Formation of loops
The typical configuration of a network with the SCALANCE products is a tree structure. The
direct connection of two ports on the switch or accidental connection over several switches
causes an illegal loop. Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
When configuring the network with SCALANCE X400, meshing is possible since, in this
case, the spanning tree algorithm can eliminate the loop. Other SCALANCE products can
also be used in this loop if they cannot form a loop with each other.
Cabling structure Cable type Max. length Max. total of the patch
cables (TP cord)
In one piece IE FC standard cable GP 100 m -
(without IE TP cords) IE FC flexible cable GP 85 m
IE FC torsion cable GP 55 m
IE FC trailing cable GP 85 m
IE FC trailing cable 85 m
IE FC marine cable 85 m
Structured IE FC standard cable GP 90 m 10 m
(with IE-TP cords and IE FC flexible cable GP 75 m
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 or IE FC torsion cable GP 45 m
IE FC RJ-45 Modular
IE FC trailing cable GP 75 m
Outlet)
IE FC trailing cable 75 m
IE FC marine cable 75 m
SCALANCE X
Real-Time Isochronous Real-Time
X414-3E
X408-2
X-400
Modular
Managed
X208PRO
Performance
X208 X216 X224 X204-2LD X206-1LD X212-2 LD X204IRT X200-4P IRT X202-2P IRT
X005
G_IK10_XX_10212
Entry Level
X005
SCALANCE X
Media converter (MC)
SCALANCE X-400
Modulare Gigabit
Office-Standards
Redundancy
SCALANCE X-200
Leistungsbereich
Managed
OMC TP11 /
SCALANCE X-100
Unmanaged
SCALANCE X005
G_IK10_XX_10199
Entry Level
Overview table
You will find a table with an overview of the product features of the various SCALANCE X
devices at the end of this section.
Management functions
A further distinction between the devices is that the SCALANCE X200, SCALANCE X300
and SCALANCE X400 devices have management functions whereas the SCALANCE X100
and SCALANCE X005 do not. While unmanaged devices are less expensive, managed
devices provide numerous configuration and diagnostics functions that make the operation of
an Industrial Ethernet network much more convenient.
PROFINET diagnostics
10/100 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s
SIMATIC environment
1000 Mbit/s
Standby redundancy
RSTP IT features
Gigabit technology
Compact housing
Layer 3 switching
Ring redundancy
LED diagnostics
TP FO TP Fiber Optic
Modular design
Signal contact
IRT capability
Local display
Digital inputs
C-PLUG slot
2 x 24 V DC
(set button)
Type of RJ45 M12 POF/ Multi- Single-
with RM
PCF mode mode
VLAN
module
IGMP
BFOC BFOC
X414-3E 2 2 4) 20 3) 12 3) 12 3) 8
X-400
X408-2 4 4 4) 4 4 1)
4 2)
X310 3 7
X-300
X308-2 1 2 5) 7
X308-2LD 1 2 5) 7
X204IRT 4
X202-2IRT 2 2
X202-2P IRT 2 2
X201-3P IRT 1 3
X200-4P IRT 4
X224 24
X216 16
X-200
X212-2 12 2
X212-2LD 12 2
X208 8
X208PRO 8
X206-1 6 1
X206-1LD 6 1
X204-2 4 2
X204-2LD 4 2
X124 24
X116 16
X112-2 12 2
X-100
X108 8
X106-1 6 1
X104-2 4 2
X005
X005 5
well suitable 1) can be additionally plugged in via multimode media modules 3) with extender module
2) can be additionally plugged in via singlemode media modules 4) can additionally be plugged with singlemode or multimode media modules with SC interface
1) and 2) a total of max. 2 media modules 100 MBit/sec can be plugged in 5) singlemode or multimode with SC interface G_IK10_XX_10216
Diagnostics options
The individual SCALANCE X devices provide the following diagnostics options:
G_IK10_XX_10138
SCALANCE X005
OSM
ESM
1) with SCALANCE X414-3E
See also
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 229)
Overview
The SCALANCE X005 switch allows the cost-effective installation of small Industrial Ethernet
linear bus or star structures with switching functionality. The devices are designed for
installation in a switching cubicle.
The SCALANCE X005 has five RJ-45 jacks for connection of end devices or other network
segments.
See also
SCALANCE X005 (Page 233)
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices (Page 105)
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
Functions
The SCALANCE X005 supports the MDI / MDIX autocrossover function. This makes it
possible to use straight-through cables.
The SCALANCE X005 also has the autonegotiation and auto polarity exchange functions.
This makes the SCALANCE X005 a plug-and-play device that does not require settings to be
made for commissioning.
Please note that ports of partner stations requiring a fixed configuration must be set to 100
Mbps/ half duplex or 10 Mbps half duplex.
Network topologies
Switching technology allows extensive networks to be set up with numerous nodes and
simplifies network expansion.
With the SCALANCE X005 device, linear bus and star topologies can be implemented.
It is not possible to use a SCALANCE X005 switch in a redundant ring because it does not
support redundancy.
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Overview
The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 series allow cost-
effective setup of Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbps linear bus or star structures with
switching functionality. They are particularly suitable for applications in the immediate vicinity
of machines and have a robust metal housing for space-saving installation in a cubicle on a
DIN rail, S7-300 standard rail or for wall mounting.
The node or network connectors are robust, designed for industry and have electrical or
optical interfaces depending on the model. The cable connectors conform to PROFINET and
lock into the housing providing additional strain and bending relief.
Simple diagnostics is possible on the device with the LEDs (power LED, fault LED, LED for
link status or data traffic) and signaling contact.
The use of a redundant power supply is also possible.
See also
SCALANCE X-100 (Page 237)
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices (Page 105)
X-100 design
Design
The SCALANCE Industrial Ethernet switches with their robust metal IP30 housing are ideal
for installation on a DIN rail and an S7-300 standard rail. It is also possible to install the
device directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to its the housing dimensions that
match those of the S7-300, the devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution
with S7-300 components.
All SCALANCE X-100 switches have the following connectors:
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
The following are available depending on the device:
● 10/100BaseTX, RJ-45 connector:
RJ-45 jack, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and
autocrossing function for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables via Industrial Ethernet
FC RJ-45 Plug 180 up to 100 m
● 100BaseFX, ST connectors, for multimode fiber-optic cables
ST sockets for direct connection to the Industrial Ethernet FO cables up to 3000 m to set
up linear bus and star structures. Wavelength: 1310 nm
With the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ-45 Plug and Industrial Ethernet FastConnect
standard cable, installation is possible without a patch panel.
Functions
The integrated switch functionality results in a distribution of network load.
Diagnostics
LEDs display the following information locally:
● Power
● Port status
● Data traffic
● Signaling contact
Signaling contact
X-100 switches can indicate the following errors/faults via the floating signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port,
● The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies,
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status by Web Based Management or using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Product features
The media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 series allow the cost-effective installation of
Industrial Ethernet linear (bus) and star structures with transitions from one media to
another.
SIMATIC evironment
Fast Ethernet
Compact housing
Ring redundancy
LED diagnostics
Signal contact
Local display
10 / 100 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
(SET button)
2 x 24 V DC
without RM
Type of module RJ45 POF / PCF Multimode Singlemode AUI Multimode
BFOC BFOC BFOC
SCALANCE X101-1 1
1
SCALANCE X101-1LD 1
1
SCALANCE X101-1POF
1 1
SCALANCE X101-1AUI 1
1
SCALANCE X101-1FL 1 1
G_IK10_XX_10137
OMC TP11 1 1
OMC TP11LD 1 1
See also
SCALANCE X-100 media converters (Page 251)
Design
The SCALANCE X-100 media converters with their robust metal housing are ideal for
installation on a DIN rail and an S7 standard rail. It is also possible to install the device
directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to their S7-300 housing dimensions, the
devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution with S7-300 components.
The SCALANCE X-100 media converters have
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
and directly below this
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
All media converters have two interfaces for connecting to an Industrial Ethernet network as
shown in the table in the previous section.
See also
Overview of the media converters (Page 116)
SIMATIC S7-400
with CP 443-1
IE Standard Cable
Industrial Ethernet Switch
SCALANCE Industrial Industrial Industrial
X108 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
OLM OLM OLM
Fiber Optic
Media-Converter
SCALANCE
X101-1FL
Figure 4-8 Example of using the X101-1FL media converter: Connection of an optical network segment to copper
Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC S7-200
with CP 243-1
IE Standard Cable
Industrial Switch
Ethernet SCALANCE 10Base5-Segment
X108
G_IK10_XX_10174
Unit
Media-Converter
SCALANCE
X101-1AUI
Figure 4-9 Example of using the X101-1AUI media converter: Connection of existing network
segments to IE networks
Network topologies
Linear bus and star topologies can be implemented with an Industrial Ethernet media
converter of the SCALANCE X-100 series. It is also possible to link rings and to use two
identical media converters in a ring structure.
Depending on the local conditions, the transition from electrical to optical media using media
converters may be a cost-effective way of bridging longer distances.
S7-400
PC
Twisted
Pair
S7-300
PC
SCALANCE
X101-1 LD
PC
PC
G_IK10_XX_10052
S7-400
The passive use of two identical media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 series within a
redundant ring is possible. In this case, the media converters behave "like a section of
cable".
S7-400
S7-300
S7-400
S7-300
PC
S7-400
Industrial Ethernet
IPC
PC
SCALANCE S7-400
X101-1 or
X101-1LD
G_IK10_XX_10054
IPC
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Overview
SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches allow the cost-effective installation of 10/100
Mbps Industrial Ethernet linear (bus), star and ring structures with switching functionality,
where availability of the network or remote diagnostics options are required. The devices
have degree of protection IP30 and are designed for installation in a switching cubicle. With
IP65, the SCALANCE X208PRO is intended for installation outside a cubicle.
SCALANCE X-200 switches vary in terms of the functions they provide and the number and
type of electrical and optical IE interfaces.
The SCALANCE X-200IRT switches form a special class by using the "cut through"
switching mechanism, the optimum solution to meet the real-time requirements of
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 260)
X-200 design
Design
The SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE X-200IRT Industrial Ethernet switches with their
robust metal housing are ideal for installation on a DIN rail and an S7-300 standard rail. It is
also possible to install the device directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to their S7-
300 housing dimensions, the devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution with
S7-300 components.
The modules have a 4-pin terminal block, the SCALANCE X208PRO has two 4-pin M12
interfaces for connecting to the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC). They also have a 2-
pin terminal block to allow the use of the signaling contact. On the SCALANCE X208PRO,
the signaling contact is connected to a 5-pin M12 socket.
Status information is indicated by a row of LEDs (power, link status, data traffic, power
supply, signaling contact).
The SCALANCE X-200 modules and SCALANCE X-200IRT are available with the following
port types for communication:
● RJ-45 connector; 10/100BaseTX:
Automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and autocrossing
function for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables via Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-
45 Plug 180 or Industrial Ethernet RJ-45 Plug up to 100 m.
Connectors
The pin assignment of the 10/100BaseTX RJ-45 connectors, the power supply terminals and
the signaling contact terminals are the same on all SCALANCE X200 devices except for the
SCALANCE X208 PRO. They are described in the section Common connector pin
assignments.
Signaling contact
The following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port,
● The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies,
● The C-PLUG (see below) is also monitored. If a C-PLUG is in the device when you press
the button, this is also stored and monitored,
● Redundancy manager connected through,
● Monitoring the POF connectors on the SCALANCE X200-P IRT devices (maintenance
request or maintenance required)
POF cables age significantly faster than glass fibers. SCALANCE X200-PIRT devices
monitor the quality of the signals received via POF cables. If the signals become too
weak, this is indicated by the signaling contact. This means that maintenance can be
performed in good time before there is a breakdown in communication.
The SCALANCE X-200IRT variants have the following additional monitoring functions:
● Switchover of standby connection
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status by Web Based Management or using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
C-PLUG
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the base device. When replacing the base device, it can be used to
transfer the data it contains to the new device without requiring a programming device.
During operation, the C-PLUG is supplied with energy by the base device. It retains all data
permanently when the power is turned off.
If an empty C-PLUG (factory settings) is inserted, all configuration data of the SCALANCE X-
200 is saved to it when the device starts up. Changes to the configuration during operation
are also saved on the C-PLUG without any operator intervention being necessary.
A basic device with an inserted C-PLUG automatically uses the configuration data of the C-
PLUG when it starts up. This is, however, only possible when the data was written by a
compatible device type.
Inserting a C-PLUG that does not contain the configuration of a compatible device type,
inadvertently removing the C-PLUG, or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by
the diagnostic mechanisms of the SCALANCE X-200 (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, WBM,
etc.).
This allows fast and simple replacement of the basic device. If a device is replaced, the C-
PLUG is taken from the failed component and inserted in the replacement. The first time it is
started up, the replacement device has the same configuration as the failed device except
for the MAC address set by the vendor.
this service. The server assigns a free IP address so that at the next startup, a connection is
not absolutely necessary.
The use of DHCP is not restricted to the startup phase. DHCP can also be used during
operation.
The IP address remains valid for a selectable period known as the "lease time". When this
expires, it must be renewed or extended.
Generally, there is no fixed address assignment; in other words, when a client requests an IP
address again, it is normally assigned a different address. It is, however, possible to
configure the DHCP server so that it makes a fixed address assignment.
Ring structures
SCALANCE X-200 products can be used in electrical, optical and mixed ring structures.
There can be up to 50 switches in a ring.
In a ring structure, the SCALANCE X-200 switches are initially connected via their ring ports
to form a linear bus. The two ends of the line are closed to form a ring by a switch operating
in redundancy manager mode. When the network is functioning correctly, the ring ports of
the redundancy manager are disconnected.
The switch operating in redundancy manager mode monitors the connected line over its ring
ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an interruption on the connected line; in
other words, it restores a functioning line over this substitute path. Reconfiguration takes
place within 0.3 s.
As soon as the problem has been eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other
words, the ring ports in the redundancy manager are once again disconnected from each
other.
Only one switch can be configured as redundancy manager (RM) in a ring.
The redundancy function of the SCALANCE X-200 is enabled and disabled by pressing a
button on the front of the device or with Web Based Management (WBM) (cannot be set via
PNIO). After the RM function has been enabled or after the RM has been switched through,
this is indicated by the RM LED on the housing.
Operator Operator
Station Stations
S7-300
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X202-2IRT X202-2IRT
100
100
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
S7-300 S7-200
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE SCALANCE
X202-2IRT X202-2IRT
100
100
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
IPC
S7-400
G_IK10_XX_10134
S7-300
Figure 4-13 Redundant coupling of two optical rings with SCALANCE X202-2IRT
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Optical redundant ring structure (Page 62)
Optical linear structure (Page 61)
The IE Switches SCALANCE X-300 from SIMATIC NET are designed for use in high-speed
plant networks that will also meet future requirements. With the HSR redundancy function
and standby coupling of rings, high network availability can be achieved. Support of IT
standards such as VLAN, RSTP, IGMP, and GARP makes seamless integration of
automation networks in existing office networks possible.
The IE Switches SCALANCE X-300 are designed for use in switching cubicles and cabinets.
See also
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 278)
Design
SCALANCE X-300 devices have the same functionality as the devices of the SCALANCE X-
400 series, however, they have the compact design of the SCALANCE X-200 devices.
See also
X-200 design (Page 122)
See also
Functions of the X-400 (Page 133)
Compatibility list
The following products and devices are compatible with IE Switches X-300:
● End devices
All SIMATIC NET products with a TP port can be connected to the ports of IE Switches X-
300.
● Network components in linear or star structure
ESM/OSM
OMC (TP cable max. 6 m long)
SCALANCE X005
SCALANCE X-100
SCALANCE X-100 medium converter
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE S-600
SCALANCE W-700
● Network components in a ring structure with IE Switches X-300 as RM
– Ring structure electrical
(All IE Switches X-300 possible, it may be necessary to reconfigure ring ports):
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
– Optical ring structure
(possible only with SCALANCE X308-2 and X308-2LD):
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
● Redundant coupling of networks.
– In the network segment with the master-slave pair of devices to be configured:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
on the standby link also to SCALANCE X-200
– In the network segment to be coupled:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
Note
All compatibility information assumes the correct use of the TP and FOC cables.
Overview
The SCALANCE X-400 product line consists of modular Industrial Ethernet switches, media
modules, and extenders. 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps technology is supported for different
transmission media (twisted pair, fiber-optic) and increased port requirements. The main
areas of application are high-performance plant networks (control level). Due to its modular
structure, the X-400 product line is designed to meet future demands and can be adapted to
meet the requirements of a particular task.
The integrated redundancy manager allows fast medium redundancy even for large
networks both for Gigabit Ethernet (SCALANCE X-300 and X-400 switches in the ring) and
for Fast Ethernet (SCALANCE X-400 switches in the ring combined with SCALANCE X-200
switches or OSMs/ESMs).
To set up optical Gigabit Ethernet rings, the integrated Gigabit Ethernet ports can be
converted to fiber-optic cable via a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet media module. Module variants
for multimode (up to 750 m FO cable) and single mode (up to 10 km) are available.
Using a plug-in 2-port Fast Ethernet media module for multimode or single mode FO cable,
SCALANCE X-400 switches can also be integrated in 100 Mbps rings with
SCALANCE X204-2 or OSMs. A second plug-in 2-port Fast Ethernet FO cable media
module allows distant nodes to be connected optically.
Remote diagnostics is possible using PROFINET diagnostics, a Web browser or SNMP.
Switches of the SCALANCE X-400 product line support office standards and therefore allow
seamless integration of automation networks into existing office networks. Virtual networks
(VLANs) can be set up. The support of standardized redundancy methods (Rapid
Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol) allows redundant interfacing to higher-level
Enterprise networks.
Interfaces
The SCALANCE X408-2 switch has four integrated gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair interfaces
(10, 100 or 1000 Mbps) to interconnect multiple switches and to connect end devices. The
nodes are connected over 4 Fast Ethernet ports integrated in the switch (10 or 100 Mbps).
The X414-3E switch has two integrated gigabit Ethernet twisted pair ports (100 or 1000
Mbps) to interconnect multiple switches. The nodes are connected over 12 Fast Ethernet
twisted-pair ports integrated in the switch (100 Mbps or even 10 Mbps).
A further eight nodes can be connected over an 8-port Fast Ethernet twisted-pair extender
docked to the right of the switch.
See also
Accessories for SCALANCE X-400 switches (Page 222)
SCALANCE X-400 (Page 293)
X-400 design
Functions
● Increased network performance
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) address of the end devices, local
data traffic remains local, only data intended for nodes in another network segment is
forwarded by the switch. With DHCP support, the IP address can be assigned by a
central DHCP server.
● Simple network configuration and network expansion:
The switch stores the data received at the ports and then forwards it to the destination
address. The restriction of the network span resulting from collision detection (CSMA/CD)
ends at the port.
● Restricting errors to the network segment affected:
SCALANCE X-400 switches only forward data with a valid checksum (CRC).
● Integration of existing network segments operating at 10 Mbps in Fast Ethernet networks
operating at 100 Mbps:
At its twisted-pair ports, the X-400 switch automatically detects the send and receive
pairs (autocrossover), the data rate 10 or 100 Mbps and full and half duplex operation
(autonegotiation).
● High-speed connection of SCALANCE X-400 switches operating at 1 Gbps:
X-400 switches have several gigabit Ethernet ports for interconnecting switches.
● Fast redundancy in the ring (reconfiguration time of the ring max. 0.3 seconds):
By interconnecting the ends of an optical line using X-400 switches to form a ring, reliable
communication can be achieved. The X-400 switch has an integrated redundancy
manager (RM) that permanently monitors the functioning of the network. It recognizes the
failure of a section in the ring or of a SCALANCE X-400 switch and activates the
substitute path within a maximum of 0.3 seconds. Rings consisting of SCALANCE X400
switches can be operated at 1000 Mbps. In rings with SCALANCE X-200 or OSMs/ESMs,
it is possible to integrate X400 switches at 100 Mbps.
● Layer 3 routing with the SCALANCE X414-3E allows communication between different IP
subnets:
– Static routing
– Dynamic routing OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) and RIPv1/2 (Routing Information
Protocol)
– Redundant routing VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
● Redundant connection to company networks:
X-400 switches support the standardized redundancy mechanism Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP). This allows a subnet to connected redundantly to a higher-level
company network with reduced requirements for the reconfiguration time (in the seconds
range).
● Support of virtual networks (VLAN):
To structure Industrial Ethernet networks with a with a growing number of nodes, an
existing physical network can be divided into several virtual subnets.
● Load limitation when using multicast protocols (for example Voice over IP, video):
By learning the multicast sources and destinations (IGMP snooping), X-400 switches can
also filter multicast data traffic and therefore limit load in the network.
● Time synchronization:
Diagnostics messages (log table entries, E-mails) are given a time stamp. The local time
is uniform throughout the network due to synchronization with a SICLOCK time
transmitter making it easier to assign diagnostics messages to several devices.
● Simple device replacement:
All settings are automatically stored on the C-PLUG exchangeable storage medium. If a
switch of the X-400 series needs to be replaced, these settings are simply transferred by
inserting the C-PLUG.
Application examples
Detailed application examples can be found in the section on network topologies.
See also
Basic structures (Page 52)
Advanced network configurations (Page 66)
MM492-2LD
Fast Ethernet
MM491-2
Gigabit or
optionally
Example 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MM492-2
Gigabit or Fast
Ethernet
e.g. for use in optical gigabit ring,
MM492-2LD
MM491-2LD
MM491-2
or
for redundant connection of optical gigabit
rings via electrical gigabit segments,
or
or
G_IK10_XX_10201
See also
Media modules (Page 324)
The twisted pair extenders can also be installed during operation. No media module is
required for data transfer with this extender module.
For slots 12 and 13 of the twisted pair extender EM495-8, you can use the cover that can
also be used on slots 9 to 11 on the basic device. Two CV490 4x100 covers are supplied
with the twisted pair extender.
● EM496-4:
This has 4 media module slots for the Fast Ethernet media modules MM491-2 and
MM491-2LD so that the SCALANCE X414-3E can be extended by up to 8 optical Fast
Ethernet ports (100 Mbps).
Figure 4-18 Empty media module extender EM496-4 without protective caps for the media module
terminal strips and without cover
Installation of the media module extender and removal or insertion of the media modules is
possible during operation. You require at least one media module for data transfer over this
extender module.
Mixed operation in slots 12 through 15 with MM491-2 and MM491-2LD modules is possible.
The media module plug connectors are protected by protective caps.
Four CV490 2x100 covers are supplied with the twisted media module extender EM496-4.
The media module plug connectors are also protected from damage by protective caps.
See also
Extender modules (Page 328)
Resistant to condensation
Interference redundancy
redundant power supply
NAT/PAT (Client-Mode)
IEEE 802.1x (RADIUS)
Antennae connections
Number of addresses
Resistant to saltwater
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
Antennae diversity
IP protection class
Forced Roaming
Use in Ex zones
-40°C to +70°C
-20°C to +60°C
PRESET-PLUG
Resistant to UV
Rapid Roaming
Rugged design
Wall mounting
0°C to+60°C
Client-Mode
C-PLUG
Syslog
SNMP
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO 1 65 2048 RJ45 external
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO 2 65 2048 RJ45 external
SCALANCE
W788-2RR 2 65 2048 RJ45 external
SCALANCE 3 65 RJ45/
2048 BFOC external
W786-3PRO
SCALANCE
W784-1 1 30 2048 RJ45 external
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
W747-1RR
SCALANCE
SCALANCE
SCALANCE
SCALANCE
SCALANCE
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
W744-1PRO
with HiPath Wireless Controller
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Number of radio interfaces
Antennae diversity
suitable
65
20
30
30
30
65
65
IP protection class
-20°C to +60°C
0°C to +60°C
Rugged design
8
1
8
8
8
8
Number of addresses
Conducted interface
PB
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
Master
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
1) no HTTPS
Antennae connections
external
external
external
external
external
external
external
WEP / WPA / WPA2
IEEE 802.11i, Hidden SSID
IEEE 802.1x (RADIUS)
1) EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP
141
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO S7-400 with
CP 443-1
and
Mobile Pocket Loox CP 443-5
Panel
277
SIMATIC S5 IWLAN
with CP 1430
S7-300
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_30180
Mobile diagnostics and services
See also
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 339)
The access points are used to set up wireless networks complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h
up to 54 Mbps both at 2.4 GHz and at 5 GHz in a rough industrial environment. Existing
LANs and WLANs can be expanded simply with Industrial Wireless LAN using the
SCALANCE W-780 access points.
All SCALANCE W78x devices are equipped with an Ethernet interface and a wireless LAN
interface (SCALANCE W788-2PRO and SCALANCE W788-2RR: two WLAN interfaces).
This makes them suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W78x forwards data within its transmission range from one node to
another without a connection to wired Ethernet being necessary.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks at
different locations.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a wireless bridge between nodes operating on
two different channels.
Other properties
● High availability and reliable wireless communication for productive operation in the plant
by reserving bandwidth and cyclic monitoring of the connection to the clients,
● Protection of investments by using the industrial standard IEEE 802.11 that is recognized
worldwide,
● Four devices in one: Access point or point-to-point connection at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz,
● Designed for tough everyday industry thanks to robust construction, protection from
vibration and shock and operation at -20 °C to 60 °C,
● Simple installation and flexible power supply with one cable for data and power with
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) complying with IEEE 802.3af,
● High data security to protect from hackers and operator errors with the latest security
mechanisms such as WPA or 128-bit encryption (AES),
● Silicone and halogen-free along with ATEX approval for hazardous areas,
● Simple device replacement in the event of a fault with C-PLUG (configuration plug),
● Simple and fast configuration with installation wizard,
● High degree of system reliability with Totally Integrated Automation (TIA),
● Automatic roaming when the connection to Industrial Ethernet is lost.
See also
SCALANCE W access points and client modules (Page 339)
SCALANCE W786-3PRO
The SCALANCE W786-3PRO access point equipped with three wireless modules uses two
modules to provide communication between the access points themselves while the third
wireless module is used to establish the RF field for the nodes, for example an automated
guided vehicle system. This also allows mesh networks to be implemented.
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks.
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a bridge between two cells operating at different
frequencies.
With a SCALANCE W-786 with more than one WLAN interface, you can also implement a
redundant wireless connection to a SCALANCE W78x with at least two WLAN interfaces.
The SCALANCE W-786 is only an access point but it can nevertheless be configured as a
client module using Web-based management. In this case, depending on the selected
model, only one wireless module is available as client.
Overview table
The following table illustrates the differences between the various variants of the
SCALANCE W786:
You will find more information on the configuration parameters of the particular device in the
SCALANCE W786 online help of Web Based Management.
See also
SCALANCE W-786 Access Points (Page 354)
Basics
(2) US variant
See also
Structuring wireless networks (Page 67)
SCALANCE W-788 (Page 143)
PROFINET communication services (Page 23)
SCALANCE W-784 Access Points (Page 369)
The client modules serve as the wireless interface between a client with an Industrial
Ethernet interface, for example, an S7-300 with CP 343-1 or ET 200pro, and the wireless
network complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h at up to 54 Mbps both at 2.4 GHz and at 5 GHz
in a tough industrial environment.
SCALANCE W-740 clients are equipped with an Ethernet port and a wireless LAN port. This
makes these devices suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W-740 is used to connect a device with an Ethernet port (for example, a
SIMATIC PLC with Industrial Ethernet communications processor) to a WLAN.
● The SCALANCE W-740 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
Depending on the device, one or eight nodes are supported on the wired network
segment.
Other properties
● High availability and reliable wireless communication for productive operation in the plant
by reserving bandwidth and cyclic monitoring of the connection to the clients.
● Protection of investments by using the industrial standard IEEE 802.11 that is recognized
worldwide
● Two devices in one: Operation at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
● Designed for tough everyday industry thanks to robust construction, protection from
vibration and shock and operation at -20 °C to 60 °C
● Simple installation and flexible power supply with one cable for data and power with
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) complying with IEEE 802.3af, even with 24 V DC
● High data security to protect from hackers and operator errors with the latest security
mechanisms such as WPA or 128-bit encryption (AES)
● Silicone and halogen-free along with ATEX approval for hazardous areas
● Simple device replacement in the event of a fault with C-PLUG (configuration plug)
See also
SCALANCE W access points and client modules (Page 339)
Authentication
Authentication protects the network from unwanted access. This is normally achieved by an
exchange of keys or certificates between client and server. There are various methods
available and these are described in the operating instructions of the SCALANCE W78x or
SCALANCE W74x.
If no authentication is required, this is possible by configuring the network as an "Open
System".
Encryption
Encryption protects the transferred data from eavesdropping and corruption. Encryption can
only be disabled if open system was selected as the authentication setting. All other security
methods include both authentication and encryption.
Various encryption methods are possible.
If you have selected Open System including encryption or Shared Key as the authentication,
you will need to define a key in the Keys menu.
● WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
A weak, symmetrical stream encryption method with only 40- or 104-bit long keys based
on the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4).
If the WPA-PSK or WPA (RADIUS) authentication method is selected, the following
alternatives are available:
● TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical encryption method with the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4). In contrast to
the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing keys derived from a main key. TKIP can
also recognize corrupted packets.
● AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that further
improves the functions of TKIP.
4.3.4.2 Logging
To evaluate the transmission quality of the SCALANCE W78x operating as the access
point, the Overlap AP function can provide interesting information. This shows all access
points that are visible on the set or adjacent channels (at 2.4 GHz). If entries exist here,
the maximum data throughput of the access point will be restricted.
For optimum data throughput, the set wireless channel must not be used by other access
points. In the 2.4 GHz band (802.11b or 802.11g), there is overlapping of the wireless
channels so that an access point occupies not only the set channel but also the two or
three adjacent channels. Care should therefore be taken the ensure that there is
adequate channel spacing to neighboring access points.
● Signal recorder
All SCALANCE W devices can record or display the signal strength of the connected
access point with the Signal Recorder function. Using this data, areas with an inadequate
signal strength can be located. The Signal Recorder can be particularly advantageous
when the client moves along a fixed path (for example suspension track).
The Signal Recorder can, however, only be controlled using the Command Line Interface.
● List of access points
The list of access points displays all available access points to which a SCALANCE W74x
can establish a wireless connection. To achieve this, the client runs a background scan
(possible only when iPCF mode is enabled). If, for example, the security settings do not
match up, the access point would not be included in the list.
Each wireless LAN has a configurable SSID (Service Set Identifier) to be able to identify
the wireless network uniquely. This is the network name and is configured on the access
point. All clients with access to this access point adopt this SSID. The SSID is displayed
in the list of access points.
● Client list
All the clients logged on at the SCALANCE W78x along with certain additional
information (wireless channel, status etc.) are displayed in the client list. This list is
available only in access point mode of the SCALANCE W78x. The list contains the
following information:
– MAC address of the client
– The wireless interface via which the client is connected
– The signal strength specified in RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator from 0% to
100%); the higher the value, the better the signal
– which encryption is activated
– the current channel over which the client communicates with the SCALANCE W78x
– the current state of the clients
SCALANCE W as bridge
A bridge is a network component that connects two networks. A bridge is not dependent on
the protocol; management of the data packages is based on the physical address of the
network nodes (MAC address). The SCALANCE W provides bridge functionality because it
handles data exchange between wired and wireless Ethernet.
Learning Table
The SCALANCE W saves the information about which MAC address can be reached over
which port in a learning table. Entries in this list are deleted automatically when there is no
further data transfer for the corresponding MAC addresses. The time after which addresses
are deleted if there is no data traffic is set in the Aging Time parameter.
The learning table contains the information about whether a MAC address can be reached
over the wired Ethernet interface or over the wireless interfaces. The SCALANCE W obtains
this information from the active data exchange.
IP mapping table
It is possible to allow WLAN access to several devices in a wired network via a
SCALANCE W746-1PRO, SCALANCE W747-1RR and SCALANCE W78x operating as
client. This makes it unnecessary to equip every device with its own wireless client. This so-
called IP mapping is possible only if the connected devices are addressed only by IP frames.
Communication with a component at the MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) is possible
only if its MAC address is configured on the client.
The client maintains a table (the IP mapping table) with the assignment of MAC address and
IP address to be able to send incoming IP frames to the correct MAC address. In principle,
any number of device is can be reached downstream from a client using IP. The client can
manage up to eight devices. When a new device is added, the oldest entry is deleted from
the table to make space is for the new entry. Since the data throughput of a wireless
connection cannot be increased indefinitely, a maximum of eight devices should be
managed by one client.
Filter
If a SCALANCE W78x is used as an access point, various filter functions can be set using
the WBM.
MAC filter
If the MAC filter is activated, communication with clients on the Ethernet side is possible only
when their source MAC addresses are entered in the table. As an alternative, there is a
possible setting with which access is denied for all specified MAC addresses. A maximum of
50 MAC addresses can be entered in the table.
With IP mapping of a SCALANCE W78x in client mode, only the MAC address assigned to
this device is relevant, the MAC addresses of the devices downstream from it on the
Ethernet side are irrelevant for filtering.
MAC Dir filter; restriction of the data traffic between MAC addresses
It is possible to filter the data traffic intended for wireless clients linked to the SCALANCE
W78x access point. This filter is used to permit a specified MAC address access only to
other specified MAC addresses. You can specify several source addresses or entries for one
destination address. The communication of the destination address is then restricted to
these entries. If a destination address is not entered in the filter, it is not subjected to any
restrictions.
Protocol filter
Without protocol filtering, the SCALANCE W78x processes all data packets regardless of the
protocol being used. To increase data security and to reduce load, it can nevertheless be
useful to prevent communication using certain protocols.
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is a compact gateway between Industrial Wireless LAN and
PROFIBUS.
● PROFIBUS master interface for flexible integration of systems from the field level in an
IWLAN wireless infrastructure complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h at up to 54 Mbps at
2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, for example with SCALANCE W access points
● PROFINET IO proxy;
Connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to a PROFINET IO controller according to
PROFINET standard:
From the perspective of the IO controller, all DP slaves are treated like IO devices with an
Ethernet interface, in other words, the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is their proxy.
● Can be used flexibly by connecting an IWLAN antenna or alternatively an antenna for
operation with RCoax cable (leaky feeder cable)
● Communication with automation systems in mobile applications, such as automated
guided vehicle systems (AGVS), storage bay conveyor systems or monorail suspension
tracks
● Increased plant availability with wireless and therefore wear-free data transmission to
mobile communications partners, for example the controller of an automated guided
vehicle systems (AGVS)
● Non-touch technology with RCoax as a substitute for slip rings, for example monorail
suspension tracks
● Integration of PROFIBUS field devices in an IWLAN wireless network (protection of
investment)
● Design to match power rail booster ideal for mounting on monorail suspension tracks
along with ET 200S
● Device replacement without PG by using the C-PLUG exhangeable medium to store
configuration, engineering and application data.
The range of devices is expanded by the SOFTNET Security Client; a sofware application
that allows secure access to automation systems protected by SCALANCE S devices.
SCALANCE S602
The SCALANCE S602 device provides flexible protection without complicated handling with
a combination of different security measures:
● Data espionage;
● Unauthorized access;
SCALANCE S602 is configured with the Security Configuration Tool.
External network
• Firewall
• Router
• NAT/NAPT-
router
IE/PB
Link
ET 200X
HMI
0 1
SCALANCE S612/S613
The security functions of the SCALANCE S612/S613 provide flexible protection against the
following, without system repercussions, protocol-independent (as of Layer 2 according to
IEEE 802.3) and without complicated handling:
● Data espionage
● Data manipulation
● Unauthorized access
The SCALANCE S612 / S613 and SOFTNET Security Client are also configured with the
Security Configuration Tool.
Service computer
with SOFTNET
Security client
External
Host computer
External network
• NAT/NAPT
Router
IE/PB
Link
ET 200X
HMI
0 1
Tunneling includes all Ethernet frames according to IEEE 802.3 (Layer 2 frames). Both IP
and non-IP frames are transmitted through the IPSec tunnel.
● Protection for devices and network segments
The firewall and VPN protective function can be applied to the operation of single
devices, several devices, or entire network segments.
● No repercussions when included in existing networks
Internal network nodes can be found without configuration. If a SCALANCE S612 / S613
is included in an existing network infrastructure, this does not mean that new settings
need to be made for the end devices; in other words, division into IP subnets is not
necessary.
Before putting the device into operation, you can first create the entire configuration offline
and then download it. For the first configuration (device with factory settings), use the MAC
address printed on the device.
The Security Configuration Tool provides two operating views in offline mode:
● Standard mode
Standard mode is the default mode in the Security Configuration Tool. It allows fast,
uncomplicated configuration of SCALANCE S operation.
● Advanced mode
Advanced mode provides extended options allowing individual settings for the firewall
rules and security functionality.
In advanced mode, a further distinction must be made between local firewall rules and
global firewall rules for modules:
– Local firewall rules are always assigned to a module. They are configured in the
properties dialog of the modules.
– Global firewall rules can be assigned to several modules at the same time. This option
simplifies configuration in many situations.
Consistency checks are running even while you make the entries in the dialogs. You can
also start a project-wide consistency check for all dialogs at any time. Only consistent project
data can be downloaded.
The saved project and configuration data are protected by encryption both in the project file
and on the SCALANCE S.
On the SCALANCE S, they are in a plug-in exchangeable medium, the C-PLUG. The
C-PLUG an exchangeable medium that allows the device to be replaced in the event of a
fault without requiring a programming device.
Each project can be protected from unauthorized access by assigning passwords.
To ensure security of administrative communication, the settings are made on the
SCALANCE S via an SSL encrypted channel.
The SSL protocol is located between the TCP (OSI layer 4) and the transmission services
(such as HTTP, FTP, IMAP etc.) and is used for a secure transaction. With SSL, the user is
sure that it is connected to the required server (authentication) and that the sensitive data is
transferred over a secure (encrypted) connection.
See also
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 223)
Part C: SCALANCE S security components (Page 383)
SCALANCE S design
The SCALANCE S has a robust metal housing ideal for installation on a DIN rail and an S7
standard rail. It is also possible to install the device directly on a wall in various positions.
Thanks to their S7-300 housing dimensions, the devices are ideal for integration in an
automation solution with S7-300 components.
Configuration and engineering data is stored in internal non-volatile memory on the
SCALANCE S. A C-PLUG can also be inserted to store this data. The compartment for the
C-PLUG is below a screw cover on the back of the device. If a SCALANCE S needs to be
replaced, the stored data can be transferred simply to the new device.
SCALANCE S devices have the following connectors:
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
● Two Industrial Ethernet connectors in the form of RJ-45 jacks with standard pinning for
connecting two separate Industrial Ethernet networks
The two Industrial Ethernet connectors, port 1 and port 2, are handled differently by the
SCALANCE S and must not be swapped over when connecting to the communication
network.
● Port 1 - external network
Upper RJ-45 jack, marked red = unprotected network area;
● Port 2 - internal network
lower RJ-45 jack, marked green = network protected by SCALANCE S;If the ports are
reversed, the device loses its protective function.
Both connectors support autonegotiation and the MDI / MDIX autocrossing function.
The advantage of the MDI /MDIX autocrossing function is that straight-through cables can be
used throughout and crossover Ethernet cables are unnecessary. This prevents
malfunctions resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This greatly simplifies
installation.
IE TP cords or IE TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can be connected to the two
IE TP ports. In conjunction with the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect IE FC Standard Cable
and IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, a total cable length of maximum 100 m is possible between two
devices.
SCALANCE S functions
The SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612 and SCALANCE S613 differ from each other
mainly in their firmware. The differences are shown in the following table.
Firewall
The firewall functionality of SCALANCE S has the task of protecting the internal network
from influences or disturbances from the external network. This means that; depending on
the configuration, only certain previously specified communication relations between network
nodes from the internal network and network nodes from the external network are allowed.
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a SCALANCE S are protected
by its firewall.
The firewall functionality can be configured for the following protocol levels:
● IP firewall with stateful packet inspection;
● Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3; (Layer 2 frames)
Stateful Inspection (also known as Stateful Packet Filter or Dynamic Packet Filter) is a
firewall technology that operates both on the network and at the application layer. The IP
packets are accepted on the network layer, inspected according to their state by an analysis
module and compared with a status table.
For the communication partner, a firewall with stateful inspection appears as a direct cable
that only allows communication according to the rules.
Firewall rules for data traffic in the following directions:
● from the internal to the external network and vice versa;
● from the internal network into an IPSec tunnel and vice versa (S612/S613 only).
In the internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612/S613, the IPsec tunnel provides
the nodes with a secure data connection through the unsecured external network to other
internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612/S613. Data exchange between devices
through the IPSec tunnel in the VPN (Virtual Private Network) has the following properties:
● Confidentiality
The data exchanged is safe from eavesdropping.
● Integrity
The data exchanged is safe from corruption/counterfeiting.
● Authenticity
Only those with the appropriate rights can set up a tunnel.
With the Security Configuration Tool, the SCALANCE S612/S613 and SOFTNET Security
Client modules that are intended to belong to an internal network can be configured to form
groups or VPNs (Virtual Private Network).
IPSec tunnels are established automatically between all SCALANCE S612/S613 modules
and SOFTNET Security Client modules that belong to the same group. All internal nodes of
this SCALANCE S612/S613 can communicate securely with each other through these
tunnels.
Tunneling includes all Ethernet frames according to IEEE 802.3 (Layer 2 frames). Both IP
and non-IP frames are transmitted through the IPSec tunnel.
Function
The SOFTNET Security Client is a software application and an integral part of the industrial
security concept that is used to protect automation systems and secure data exchange
between automation systems:
● Fully integrated intuitive configuration without specialist security knowledge
● A common configuration tool with a common database for SCALANCE S and SOFTNET
Security Client
– Automatic generation of certificates by the Security Configuration Tool
– Automatic learning of the nodes of the internal network and detection of the
SCALANCE S modules in the external network
● Use of the tried-and-tested IPsec mechanisms for setting up and operating VPNs
● Allows secure access by programming devices, PCs and notebooks to automation
systems or automation cells protected by SCALANCE S.
Principle of application
The SOFTNET Security Client PC software provides VPN services on the PG or notebook.
This allows secure IP-based access from a PC/PG to automation systems in subnets
protected by SCALANCE S612/S613.
How it works
The SOFTNET Security Client reads in the configuration created with the Security
Configuration Tool and gets the required information on the certificates to be imported from
the file. The root certificate and the private keys are imported and stored on the local PG/PC.
Following this, security settings are made based on the data from the configuration so that
applications can access IP addresses downstream from the SCALANCE S modules.
If a learning mode for the internal nodes or programmable controllers is enabled, the
configuration module first sets a security policy for the secure access to SCALANCE S
modules. The SOFTNET Security Client then addresses the SCALANCE S modules to
obtain the IP addresses of the relevant internal nodes. SOFTNET Security Client enters
these IP addresses in special filter lists belonging to this security policy. Following this,
applications such as STEP 7 can communicate with the programmable controllers over VPN.
4.5.1 Introduction
Basics
The OSMs/ESMs ("Optical Switch Module", "Electrical Switch Module") and ELS ("Electrical
Lean Switch") are an older generation of Industrial Ethernet Switches from SIMATIC NET.
10 / 100 /
PROFINET diagnosis
1000 Mbit/s
Standby redundancy
Gigabit technology
Compact housing
Layer 3 switching
Ring redundancy
TP / FO TPTP Fiber Optic
Modular design
Office features
LED diagnosis
Signal contact
IRT capability
Local display
Digital inputs
2 x 24 V DC
(set button)
with RM
OSM
OSM ITP53 5 3 8
OSM
ITP62-LD 6 2 8
OSM BC08 8 8
ESM TP40 4 4
ESM
ESM TP80 8 8
ESM ITP80 8 8
ELS TP40 2 2
ELS TP40M
ELS
2 2
ELS TP80 8
suitable G_IK10_XX_10208
Properties
See also
Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM) (Page 389)
Functions
Improving network performance
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) address of the end devices, local
data traffic remains local, only data intended for nodes in another subnet is forwarded by the
OSM or ESM.
Error containment
The OSM/ESM limits the propagation of errors in a network to the subnet involved because it
forwards only valid data.
Interfaces
All modules have the following connectors and operator controls:
● A 6pin terminal block for connecting the power supply (redundant 24 V DC power supply)
and the floating signal contact.
● A row of LEDs and a selection button to display the mode and status information.
● The StandbySync port is used to synchronize two modules when linking redundant
networks.
● The OSMs/ESMs can be upgraded to new firmware revisions and can be assigned
parameters via the serial port.
The OSM/ESM has a total of eight LAN ports. Depending on the particular variant, they have
the following ports:
● Twistedpair port (D-sub): 10/100Base-TX
9pin D-sub socket (ITP port), automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbps) for
connection of TP cables (max. length 100 m)
● Twistedpair port (RJ-45): 10/100Base-TX
RJ45 jack, automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbps) for connection of TP Cords
(max. length 10 m, in conjunction with FC Outlets RJ45 and Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect cable (patch cabling) up to 100 m)
● Glass FOC: Multimode (MM); 100Base-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of multimode FOC in
environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 3000 m between two OSMs
● Glass FOC: Single mode (SM); 100Base-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of single mode FOC in
environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 26 km between two OSM
ITP62LD modules.
For an overview of the number of interfaces available on the various models, refer to the
Overview of the functions.
See also
Overview of the functions (Page 170)
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
S7-400
S7-300
OSM
OSM OSM
OSM
10/100 Mbit/s
LWL
OSM
OSM
OSM
OSM 100 Mbit/s PC
OSM
OSM 10/100
Mbit/s
OSM
OSM OSM
OSM
G_IK10_XX_10059
Figure 4-34 Redundant ring structure with OSMs (switched network)
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no components (for
example switches from other vendors) other than SCALANCE X switches OSMs or ESMs
are used in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy manager mode.
End devices or complete network segments can be attached to ports 1 - 6 of an OSM/ESM
operating in the RM mode.
See also
Optical redundant ring structure (Page 62)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Functions
Network management provides the following functions:
● Password protected login for administrators (write and read rights) and users (read rights
only),
● Reading out version and status information
● Setting the message and standby mask and address information,
● Fixed parameter settings for ports and filter tables,
● Output of statistical information,
● Diagnostics of data traffic,
● Selectable mirror port,
● Downloading new firmware versions via the network.
If problems occur in the network, the OSM/ESM can send error messages (traps)
automatically to a network management system or Emails to a network administrator.
Remote monitoring
Remote monitoring (RMON) provides the following functions:
The OSM/ESM is capable of visualizing statistical information according to the RMON
Standards 1 to 3. These include, for example, error statistics maintained for each port
separately.
Overview
The Electrical Lean Switch ELS product generation allows powerful Fast Ethernet networks
with a small number of interfaces to be set up in industry. Nodes are connected solely over
twisted-pair interfaces, in other words, electrical interfaces.
The Electrical Lean Switches (ELS) allow the cost-effective installation of Industrial Ethernet
bus or star structures with switching functionality. The ELS are designed for installation in a
switching cubicle.
See also
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS) (Page 412)
General
The ELS TP devices are plug-and-play devices that require no settings when they are put
into operation.
All ELS TP devices provide the following functions:
● Autonegotiation,
● MDI/MDIX autocrossover function
● Configuration of individual events that will trigger the sending of E-mails and/or traps.
The ELS TP40M includes integrated Web-Based Management; in other words, it can be
operated using an Internet browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape). The
modules are operated using a Java applet stored on the ELS that is loaded by the browser.
For the browser to be able to load the applet, a Java virtual machine (JVM) is required. As of
Version 6.x, Netscape provides a JVM integrated in the browser that can be used for Web
Based Management. For the Microsoft Internet Explorer, the JVM Plugin must be installed
separately. On the CD supplied with the ELS TP40M, you will find a suitable JVM from Sun
Microsystems. The latest JVM versions can also be downloaded free from the Web pages of
Sun Microsystems.
184
Figure 5-1
SC
Plug
M12-
RJ45
9-pin/
Outlet
power
BFOC
15-pin
SC RJ
with SC
Devices
Modular
connector
connector
connector
with RJ45
connector
IE devices
IE devices
IE devices
IE devices
with BFOC
connection
connection
connection
connection
connection
with Sub-D
with SC RJ
90/145/180
IP67 hybrid
IE FC RJ45
IE FC RJ45
IE FC Outlet
ITP connector
IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2
A coded
connector B coded
IE FC Cable 4x2
IE FC Standard Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2x2 IE FC Cable 2x2
IE FC Torsion Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Trailing Cable 2x2
IE FC Marine Cable 2x2
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 IE TP Cord 2x2
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15
IE TP XP Cord 9/9
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
Part B: Passive components and accessories
Properties
This section describes the technical properties of the Industrial Twisted Pair and twisted-pair
cables. The unassembled cables are described first. Following this, the available assembled
cables will be introduced.
Standards
The EN 50173 standard describes the structured cabling of office buildings. IEC 24702
describes the structured building networking of an industrial building. The description of the
automation system within an industrial building can be found in IEC 61918 and the
communications-specific part of PROFINET is in IEC 61784-5-3.
See also Appendix (Page 583)
Structured cabling
Structured cabling describes the cabling of building complexes for information technology
purposes regardless of the applications used. A building is divided into the following areas:
● Primary area
(interconnection of buildings of a campus)
● Secondary area
(interconnection between floors of a building)
● Tertiary area (information technology connectors for the end devices of a floor)
TP Cords can be used as patch cables between devices and on patch panels.
The structured cabling that can be implemented with the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect
system complies with the tertiary cabling described in EN 50173.
Active distributor,
e.g. SCALANCE X-400 Terminal device,
e.g. S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10061
Connection socket, Connection socket,
e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45 e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45
A+B < 10 m IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet
A+B+C < 100 m
Note
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (IE FC Standard Cable) are intended for indoor use.
Twisted Pair cables (TP Cord) are intended for use in switching cubicles.
See also
Components for electrical networks (Page 423)
Appendix (Page 583)
5.3.2.1 FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet
General
When installing Industrial Ethernet (IE) networks, there are various cable types available for
different applications.
The Industrial Ethernet FC cables listed should be used.
The symmetrical radial structure of the FastConnect (FC) twistedpair cables allows the use
of the IE FC stripping tool. This allows fast and straightforward assembly of the IE FC RJ-
45 Outlet or IE FC RJ-45 Plug.
See also
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet (Page 428)
General
To operate 1 gigabit Ethernet networks, 8-wire cables are required. The available
FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cable is category 6 (CAT6) according to the
international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173. This cable is also suitable for
lower data rates such as 100 Mbps.
The symmetrical radial structure of the FastConnect (FC) twistedpair (TP) cable allows the
use of the IE FC stripping tool. This allows fast and straightforward assembly of the
IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet.
Note: The user may need to readjust the IE FC stripping tool 6GK1 901-1GA00 for the 4x2
cable variant. The two setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be
opened by approximately half a turn.
Cabling with 8-wire cables is always advisable if there is any plan to change over to 1 gigabit
in the foreseeable future.
See also
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet (Page 438)
General
The IE TP 2 x 2 Cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling
system. It is intended for use in switching cubicles. The cable is now only used as an adapter
cable to connect devices with a D-sub port to devices with an RJ45 port.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 423)
General
The IE TP 4x2 Cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling
system. It is intended for use in switching cubicles. This cable is only available
preassembled.
The cable is suitable for a transmission rate of 10/100/1000 Mbps.
A maximum of 10 m of twistedpair cord can be used between two devices. With structured
cabling using two IE TP Cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables together.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet) (Page 426)
General
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 in conjunction with the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet is the
ideal solution when a device such as the SCALANCE W needs to be supplied with power at
the same time. The cable includes
● 2 x 2 wires for data transmission according to CAT 5e
● 2 x 2 wires each with a core diameter of 0.76 mm to supply power
Power supply according to the Power over Ethernet standard (PoE) can also be carried on
the power wires; in other words up to 57 V.
Application
With the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with power
insert, distant nodes such as the SCALANCE W can be supplied with data (10/100 Mbps)
and power at the same time. Having both data and power on one cable leads to a significant
reduction of installation costs.
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 is halogen-free for universal use in industry and office. It is
UV resistant to UL 1581 Sec. 1200.
The maximum cable length between the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet and the SCALANCE W
access point is 80 m with an additional 6 m patch cable to the Modular Outlet. An IP67
hybrid cable connector is recommended for connection to the SCALANCE W.
See also
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 445)
General
Two cable types are used for the Industrial Twisted Pair cable (ITP cable):
● ITP Standard Cable for Industrial Ethernet
● ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet
Compared with the standard cable, the FRNC cable has a jacket of thermoplastic copolymer
that is extremely flame retardant and halogen-free. The electrical properties are largely the
same.
Both ITP cables can be ordered either in meters or preassembled with connectors. They
allow connection of a single end device or the connection of two active network components
(SCALANCE X / OSM / ESM).
See also
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP) (Page 448)
General
The preassembled Twisted Pair Cords (patch cables) can be used inside switching cubicles
and for transmission links up to 10 m. Compared with the Industrial Twisted Pair cables, the
Twisted Pair Cords are much thinner and more flexible. The connectors are standardized
RJ-45 plugs and D-sub male connectors for connection to Industrial Twisted Pair
components.
The IE TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 and IE TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 have 4 x 2 wires. They
therefore comply with category 6 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173 and are therefore suitable for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet.
The other cables have 2 x 2 wires. They comply with Cat 5e and are suitable for 10/100
Mbps Ethernet.
Application
The following schematics show the available cables and their applications.
Network S7-400
component
NC Prepared IE TP Cord 2x2
S7-300
PC
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
Sub-D-9 Sub-D-15
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
Plug RJ45 RJ45 Plug
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
Network Network
NC NC
component component
Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2
S7-400 S7-400
S7-300 S7-300
Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2
PC
G_IK10_XX_10109
Figure 5-3 Use of TP Cord for direct connection of individual components (10/100 Mbps)
Network component
Plug
Plug
Sub-D-9
RJ45
NC IE FC Outlet RJ45
NC Sub-D-9
RJ45
PC
Plug S7-300 IE FC Outlet RJ45 S7-300 Plug
Sub-D-15 Sub-D-15
RJ45 RJ45
IE TP Cord 2x2 IE FC TP Cable 2x2 IE TP Cord 2x2
Figure 5-4 Use of TP Cord as a patch cable with IE FC Outlets RJ-45 (10/100 Mbps)
Network Network
component
NC prepared IE TP Cord 4x2
NC component
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
G_IK10_XX_10092
If components not supporting Autocrossing are used it is required
to use IE TP XP Cord between two network components or two terminals.
Figure 5-5 Use of TP Cord for direct connection of individual components (10/100/1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE X-400
G_IK10_XX_10091
If components not supporting Autocrossing are used it is required
to use IE TP XP Cord between two network components or two terminals.
Figure 5-6 Use of TP Cord as a patch cable with IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlets (10/100/1000 Mbps)
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair cords (Page 451)
General
The preassembled IE M12 Connecting Cables are ideally suited for connecting Industrial
Ethernet nodes (for example SCALANCE X208PRO) with degree of protection IP65. They
are suitable for transmission rates of 10/100 Mbps. These is IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP
with D-coded M12 male connectors at both ends.
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 197)
IE M12 connecting cable (Page 458)
General
The preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables use the robust 9 or 15-pin D-sub male
connectors on an ITP standard cable. These cables have the supplement "ITP". These
cables require end devices and network components with Industrial Twisted Pair ports.
The connection between an active network component and the end device is established
with an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with a 9pin (network component end) and a 15pin D-sub
connector at the end device end.
To connect two active network components, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with two 9pin D-
sub connectors is used. The two wire pairs are crossed over. Crossover cables have the
additional "XP" marking (crossed pairs).
To connect two end devices to each other, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with two 15pin D-
sub connectors is used. The wire pairs are again crossed over and this cable also has the
additional "XP" marking.
Network component
S7-400
S7-300
NK Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Connectors Connectors
Sub-D-9 ITP Standard Sub-D-15
Cable 9/15
Connectors Connectors
Sub-D-9 ITP XP Standard Sub-D-9
Cable 9/9
S7-400 S7-400
S7-300 S7-300
Preassembled crossover
Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Connectors Connectors
Sub-D-15 ITP XP Standard Sub-D-15
Cable 15/15
Figure 5-8 Use of preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables for direct connection of individual components
See also
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables (Page 459)
General
Interface converters are used to connect an end device with an RJ-45 port to the Industrial
Twisted Pair cabling system.
At one end, the interface converter has an RJ-45 plug to connect the end device, at the other
end it has a 15-pin D-sub female connector with slide locking mechanism. Plug and female
connector are connected by a short TP Cord. This converts the RJ-45 jack of the end device
into an Industrial Twisted Pair end device interface. Double-shielded ITP standard cables up
to 90 min length can be connected to the 15-pin D-sub female connector. These cables can
also be installed in areas with strong EMI.
See also
Twisted pair interface converters (Page 457)
General
IE FC RJ-45 Plugs are compact and robust cable connectors that can be used both in an
industrial environment as well as in the office world. The connectors have a robust metal
casing suitable for industry that provides ideal protection from interference for the data
communication.
The cable connectors allow point-to-point connections (10/100 Mbps) to be implemented for
Industrial Ethernet between two end devices/network components up to 100 m without patch
cables.
The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ-45 Plugs allow simple and fast assembly of the
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect installation cables 2 x 2 (4-wire twisted-pair cables) on site.
The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool for preparing the end of a cable (stripping
the jacket and shield in one step) allows simple stripping and fast fitting of the cable
connector to the cable. Since the cable connector does not have any loose parts, it can be
fitted in difficult conditions.
See also
IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 463)
General
The IP 67 hybrid cable connector is used to connect a SCALANCE W-700 to Industrial
Ethernet. In conjunction with the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet with power insert, power can also be supplied to the target device alongside the data
transmission. The connection of a power supply for Power over Ethernet (PoE) is possible.
The IP 67 hybrid cable connector cannot be ordered separately. It ships with the
SCALANCE W-700.
See also
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug (Page 466)
General
The IE M12 Plug PRO is a 4-pin, D-coded M12 male connector with degree of protection
IP67. It is particularly suitable for use with devices with the relevant degree of protection
such as the SCALANCE X208PRO. It can fitted to cables with an outer diameter of 6 mm to
8 mm. It is suitable for assembling IE FC cables with a transmission rate of up to 100 Mbps.
This allows the IE FastConnect Stripping Tool to be used. By using the insulation piercing
technique, assembly is simple and fast and requires no additional special tools.
With IE FC cable 2 x 2 and IE M12 Plug PRO, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is
permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
Overview
The previous section IE M12 Plug PRO introduced the IE M12 Plug PRO and the
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug. These plugs are used to connect IE FC cables to IP65 devices. Power
can also be supplied via the IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug.
For devices such as the SCALANCE X208PRO, other cable connectors are required:
● The Power M12 Cable Connector PRO (female), a 4-pin M12 cable connector, A-coded,
to supply the 24 V operating voltage; the power cable 2 x 0.75 is recommended as the
cable.
● The Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO (female), a 5-pin M12 cable
connector, B-coded, for the signaling contact.
See also
IP65 plug (Page 467)
5.3.6 Outlets
General
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 is used to implement the transition from the robust
Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables used in the industrial environment to preassembled TP
Cord cables using an RJ45 jack. When used with FC TP cables and preassembled TP
Cords, the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 saves considerable time during installation.
Color coding prevents errors when connecting the wires. The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet
RJ45 corresponds to category 5e of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173.
Design
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 consists of a robust metal casing. The screw-on
cover ensures reliable shield contact and strain relief for the Industrial Ethernet FC cable.
The Outlet RJ45 has the following terminals:
● 4 insulationpiercing contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC cable (contacts
colorcoded)
● RJ45 jack with dust protection cap for connecting various TP Cord cables.
See also
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 (Page 474)
General
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet is designed for use in industry and is suitable for
transmission links with data rates of 10/100/1000 Mbps according to ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173.
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet basic module can be equipped with various optional inserts
without changing the wiring (permanent wiring):
● Insert 2 FE: Two Fast Ethernet connections for attachment of two 10/100 Mbps end
devices/network components
● Insert 1 GE: One gigabit Ethernet connection for attaching a 10/100/1000 Mbps end
device/network component
See also
IE FC Modular Outlet (Page 470)
Advantages
● Electrical isolation of nodes and segments
● No grounding problems,
● No shield currents,
● Transmission path immune to external electromagnetic noise,
● No lightning protection required,
● No noise emission along the transmission path,
● Light weight,
● Depending on the fiber type, cables several kilometers long can be used even at higher
transmission rates.
Point-to-point link
Fiber-optic technology only allows the implementation of point-to-point links; in other words,
one transmitter is connected to only one receiver. The transmission path between two nodes
therefore requires two fibers (one for each transmission direction). All SIMATIC NET
standard fiber-optic cables are therefore designed as duplex cables.
See also
Overview of plastic FO cable and PCF FO cable (Page 205)
Application
FO Standard Cable
Simple configuration
All the descriptions and operating instructions for SIMATIC NET bus components contain
information about the distances that can be covered with the standard fibers described
above. You can configure your optical network without complicated calculations using simple
limit values (refer to chapter 3 "Network structures and network configuration").
See also
Glass FO cables 50/125 (Page 481)
Application
The FO Ground Cable is a longitudinally watertight and laterally water protected cable with
non-metallic rodent protection that is suitable for direct installation underground. It is suitable
for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850 nm and 1300
nm.
Properties
The FO Ground Cable has the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
Application
Fiber-optic standard cable
● Universal cable for use indoors and outdoors
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
● halogen-free, can be walked on, flame retardant FO cable
for use in buildings
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
● for situations in which the cable must be capable of moving
SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
● Hybrid cable consisting of two fibers and two additional copper wires
for fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities
Simple configuration
All the descriptions and operating instructions for SIMATIC NET bus components contain
information about the distances that can be covered with the standard fibers described
above. You can configure your optical network without complicated calculations using simple
limit values (refer to chapter 3 "Network structures and network configuration").
See also
Glass FO cables 62.5/125 (Page 492)
General
Special tools are necessary to fit connectors to glass FO cables. This should also only be
performed by trained personnel. If users keep to certain rules when handling and laying
preassembled glass FO cables, they can be very useful if the users do not have the
personnel required for such tasks.
You will find information on handling fiber-optic cables in the sections Connecting fiber-optic
cables and Laying bus cables.
When connecting cables with BFOC connectors to the devices, remember that these must
be crossed over so that there is a connection between transmitter and receiver and receiver
and transmitter. If the cables have SC connectors, this is guaranteed by the connector
coding.
See also
Connecting fiber-optic cables (Page 559)
Laying bus cables (Page 574)
Preassembled FO cables (Page 508)
Figure 5-15 Plastic optical fiber (POF) and plastic cladded fiber (PCF) cables
Plastic FO cable also known as POF cable (Plastic Optical Fiber) can be installed with a
cable length of up to 50 m. In SIMATIC NET, POF cables with a fiber diameter of 980 µm are
used. PCF and POF cables work at a light wavelength of 650 nm.
If the cable length is not adequate, PCF (Plastic Cladded Fiber) can be used instead. The
maximum length of a PCF cable is 100 m.
Examples of application
FO cable with
simplex connector
G_IK10_XX_50061
Figure 5-16 Connection example: Optical networking of two components with plastic FO cable (here in a PROFIBUS
installation)
SCALANCE
Control & Monitoring
SIMATIC S7-300 X101-1POF
with CP 343-1 media converter ET 200pro
POF FO
G_IK10_XX_10176
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
Figure 5-17 Application example: Setup of a network using POF cables in Industrial Ethernet
See also
Plastic FO cable POF and PCF (Page 497)
Special cables
In addition to SIMATIC NET standard FO cables described in the IK PI catalog, there are
numerous special cables and installation accessories available. Listing all would exceed the
scope of both the catalog and this manual.
The technical specifications of the SIMATIC NET bus components contains the SIMATIC
NET FO cables used as standard cables for connections and also lists additional fiber types
that can be used.
Note
Remember that the distances that can be covered change if you use fibers with a different
core diameter or attenuation properties from those listed as standard in the operating
instructions.
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 185)
5.5.1 Antennas
Antennas
Antennas for use with SCALANCE W devices are distinguished by the following
characteristics:
● Omnidirectional antennas emit and receive in all directions; Directional antennas cover
greater distances and increase the link quality in environments with multiple sources of
EMI interference but provide no significant area coverage.
● Detached antennas increase the reliability of wireless connections by optimizing the
transmission and reception conditions; connection to access point/client over cable;
antennas directly on the device allow a compact, low-maintenance design.
● Frequency band: The antennas can communicate in the 2.4 GHz band, in the 5 GHz
band or in both bands.
● RCoax leaky feeder cables can be used in special environments as an alternative to
conventional antennas.
● Antenna diversity stabilizes wireless links
The individual antenna types are as follows:
ANT795-4MR, ANT795-4MS
With these omnidirectional antennas, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz in
the vertical plane of the antenna. Both antennas have a beamwidth of 30° and an antenna
again of 4 dB. They are mounted directly on the R-SMA connector on the SCALANCE W
housing.
The ANT795-4MR antenna can only be turned around one axis and is normally used due to
its IP65 degree of protection primarily with the SCALANCE W-788 access points and the
SCALANCE W744-1PRO, W746-1PRO and W747-1PRO client modules. Two of these
antennas ship with these access points or client modules.
The ANT795-4MS has an additional joint and is therefore suitable for the SCALANCE W784-
1 and W784-1RR access points and the SCALANCE W744-1, W746-1 and W747-1 client
modules.
ANT792-6MN, ANT793-6MN
With these omnidirectional antennas, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz (ANT792-6MN)
and 5 GHz (ANT793-6MN) in the vertical plane of the antenna. The antennas have an
antenna gain of 6 dB or 5 dB respectively.
The N-Connect connector is used that can be connected to a SCALANCE W over a variety
of IWLAN extension cables. Both antennas ship with a mounting bracket that allows wall or
mast mounting. This makes the antennas particularly suitable, for example, for illuminating a
space with a mounting mast in the middle.
The TI795-1R terminator also ships with both antennas. This is required to terminate the
radio waves of the second antenna connector on a SCALANCE W when only one antenna is
being used.
With this omnidirectional antenna, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz in the
vertical plane of the antenna. The antenna has an antenna gain of 6 dB or 8 dB.
The N-Connect connector is used that can be connected to a SCALANCE W over a variety
of IWLAN extension cables. The antenna characteristics are such that transmission
properties are good even directly below or above the antenna. It is designed for roof
installation but can be installed on or under a roof and is therefore suitable for mobile
application, for example in an automated guided vehicle system. If it needs to be installed on
ceiling below a roof, the optional antenna mounting tool (ANT795-6MN) is used.
ANT795-6DN
This wide-angled antenna aligns the RF field at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
The antenna is suitable, for example, for illuminating the space located in front of a wall.
ANT792-8DN, ANT793-8DN
These antennas genuinely radiate the RF field in a specific direction at 2.4 GHz (ANT792-
8DN) or 5 GHZ (ANT793-8DN). Due to the restricted beamwidth, the RF field is concentrated
into a narrow cone. This achieves high passive gain and long distances.
With their high passive gain, the antennas are suitable for covering long distances with
IWLAN.
See also
Antennas (Page 511)
IWLAN RCoax leaky feeder cables when operated as the antennas of SCALANCE W access
points, provide a reliable wireless connection in areas in which it would be difficult to install
traditional antenna technology.
The defined cone-shaped RF field that develops along the leaky feeder cable allows reliable
transmission of data in all systems in which the mobile nodes move on defined paths. The
IWLAN RCoax cable is therefore not subjected to wear and tear and requires little
maintenance.
● Reliable illumination in areas otherwise difficult for wireless, for example in cranes, high-
bay storage stackers/retrievers, transfer lines, tunnels or monorail suspension tracks
● Generation of a wedge-shaped RF field
● Low interference or mutual disturbance with low transmit power
● Cost saving by direct replacement slip rings and trailing cable
● Highly flexible application
See also
RCoax leaky feeder cable (Page 519)
Antenna cables
● Antennas are fitted with antenna cables and R-SMA connectors; as an option, an
extension cable is available,
● All cables provide flame protections, are chemically resilient and silicone free. ("FRNC"
cable)
See also
Antennas (Page 511)
Various WLAN accessories (Page 521)
5.5.4 SINEMA E
5.5.4.1 SINEMA E
See also
Expanded functions of SINEMA E Standard (Page 221)
SINEMA E (Page 522)
Installation
Customer personnel
G_IK10_XX_10135
Offline Online
Above, you can see a screenshot of the SINEMA E application showing the modeling of a
building. The simulation acquires a three-dimensional arrangement of the building parts and
equipment as well as the active and passive components of the wireless network.
Devices, antennas and wireless obstacles can be selected from a component catalog and
adapted to the actual situation. The simulation that follows soon provides the configuration
engineer with a picture of the signal qualities that can be expected in individual configured
areas. An integrated consistency check ensures the validity of the configuration and reduces
possible errors before the network is installed.
With the graphic user interface, even complex environments can be simulated with little
effort.
In the area configured in the previous step, the expected signal strengths are calculated for
each point and represented in a pseudo color image.
Product catalogs
This simulation is made particularly user-friendly by the comprehensive product catalogs
supplied with the tool. These allow simulated hardware based on SIEMENS own products
and third-party products to be included in the simulation. Modules shown with a precise list of
their technical characteristics are simply taken from the catalog and placed in the simulated
building.
The catalog can also be expanded by the customer to include new models and
functionalities.
In the simulation mode shown above, a building floorplan can be seen with RF fields
generated by several access points. The signal strengths achieved at various points in the
room are shown by different color intensities.
Note how the geometry of the room (for example the corridor bottom center) is also taken
into account and included in the realistic prognosis.
Report module
A report module is integrated in both the simulation and diagnostics functions of both
SINEMA E versions, Lean and Standard.
Based on the configuration that develops through the stages of simulation, this generates a
parts list including the ordering data of all the devices used from the module catalog. This
simplifies the creation of an offer, planning and cost predictions for a project.
When setting up the wireless network, the coordinates at which the individual devices should
be installed can also be taken from the report. This simplifies fast, problem-free and reliable
installation of the individual components.
The report also contains the simulations performed in the form of informative graphics
containing the signal strength and data rate along with interference. This report is therefore
also the acceptance document for commissioning and can be used in questions involving
warranties and service situations.
Other properties
Using the materials/regions builder, a further component of the SINEMA E module, complex
obstacles and other building parts (such as large transformers or turbines) can be measured
as they stand, stored and then used in the current or future simulations.
5.6 Accessories
Order number
SCALANCE X400 cover set 6GK5490-0AA00-0AA2
Terminal set 6GK5498-0AA00-0AA0
Application
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the basic device. This means that the configuration data remains
available if the basic device is replaced. It is therefore used when the replacement of
network components or communications modules needs to be quick if a fault occurs without
needing to configure a replacement and without needing specialist personnel. Downtimes of
network segments and connected Industrial Ethernet nodes can therefore be minimized if a
fault occurs.
It can be used in all SIMATIC NET products with a C-PLUG slot.
Design
The C-PLUG has degree of protection IP20. With IP65 components, the degree of protection
is retained because the C-PLUG is installed inside the protected housing.
Power is supplied by the host device. The C-PLUG retains all data when the power is turned
off.
Function
If an empty CPLUG (as supplied) is inserted in a SIMATIC NET component, the device
automatically backs up the configuration data during startup. Changes to the configuration
during operation are also saved on the C-PLUG without any additional operator intervention
being necessary.
When an unconfigured device starts up, it automatically adopts the configuration data of an
inserted C-PLUG assuming the data was written by a compatible device type.
The C-PLUG can also be used to store application data such as documentation or Web
pages.
Diagnostics
Incorrect use of the C-PLUG, such as inserting a C-PLUG containing the configuration of a
different device group or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by diagnostics
mechanisms of the host device (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, Web based Management, etc.).
See also
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 525)
See also
IP65 power supply (Page 526)
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
Note
Please note that the data provided here is only intended to give you general information.
Our products are in constant development and the specifications and reference data may
change in the course of this development. Despite all our efforts, it is possible that individual
items of information in this networking manual are out of date.
You will find the continuously updated data in the product manuals of the individual devices.
Note the following information and warnings relating to the SCALANCE X switches and media
converters:
Note
The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge test on power supply lines are met only when a
Blitzductor VT AD 24V type no. 918 402 is used
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt,
Germany
WARNING
When used under hazardous conditions (zone 2), the devices of the SCALANCE X-100/X-
200/X-300 and X-400 product lines must be installed in an enclosure.
To comply with ATEX100a (EN 60079-15), this enclosure must meet the requirements of at
least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD: DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A
FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
Note
The approvals specified for the individual products apply only when the corresponding mark
is shown on the product. You can check which of the various approvals have been granted
for your product by the markings on the type plate.
CE mark
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet switches meet the requirements and aims
of the following EU directives and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) for
programmable logic controllers published in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
● Directive 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● Directive 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage
Limits" (Low Voltage Equipment Directive)
● Directive 94/9/EEC Equipment and Protective Systems intended for Use in Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres (Explosion Protection Directive).
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available for the responsible authorities according to
the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industrielle Kommunikation SIMATIC NET
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg, Germany
● On the SCALANCE X-400, the signaling contact is connected by contacts MK1 and MK2
on the 4-pin connector on the rear terminal block on the power module.
You should also refer to the operating instructions of the individual devices in question.
Pin number Pin assignment of 10/100BaseTX Pin assignment of the gigabit Ethernet
ports
Pin 8 n. c. 3-
Pin 7 n. c. 3+
Pin 6 TD- 1-
Pin 5 n. c. 2-
Pin 4 n. c. 2+
Pin 3 TD+ 1+
Pin 2 RD- 0-
Pin 1 RD+ 0+
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
Certifications:
SCALANCE X005
c-UL-us UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
C-Tick AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Display elements
The status of the power supply is indicated by a green LED. It is lit green when an operating
voltage between 18 V and 32 V is connected.
The status of the communication ports is indicated by five LEDs, one per port:
Status Meaning
Ports 1 to 5: LED lit green TP link exists, no data reception
Ports 1 to 5: LED lit yellow TP link exists, data received at TP port
Ports 1 to 5: LED flashes yellow Test phase during power on
Operator controls
The SCALANCE X005 does not have any operator controls.
Figure 6-4 Pin assignment of the two-pin plug-in terminal block for the power supply
Pin Assignment
1 M (chassis ground)
2 L+ (+18 -- +32 V DC)
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
SCALANCE X005
Power supply 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC 2W
Current consumption at 24 V DC 80 mA
Overvoltage protection at input PTC resettable fuse (0.5 A / 60 V)
Transmission rate 10/100 Mbps
Aging time 375 seconds
Emission EN 61000-6-4
EN 61000-6-3 with snap ferrite on the cables
Manufacturer: Würth Elektronik - type: 742 711 31
Immunity EN 61000-6-2
MTBF 167.1 years
SCALANCE X005
Operating temperature 0 °C - +65 °C
Storage/transport temperature -40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation < 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude 2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
SCALANCE X005
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 40 x 125 x 124
Weight 550 g
Installation options • DIN rail
• S7-300 standard rail
• Wall mounting
Certifications
type plate.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
Assembly
Install the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line on a 35 mm rail
according to DIN EN 50022.
1. Place the upper catch of the device over the top of the DIN rail and then push in the lower
part of the device against the rail until it clips into place.
2. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
4. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
Uninstalling
To remove the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line from the
DIN rail:
1. First disconnect all connected cables.
2. Use a screwdriver to release the lower DIN rail catch of the device and pull the lower part
of the device away from the rail.
Figure 6-7 SCALANCE X-100 removing from a DIN rail (35 mm)
Uninstalling
To remove Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line from the
SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail:
1. First disconnect all connected cables.
2. Loosen the device screws on the underside of the S7 standard rail and lift the device
away from the rail.
Wall mounting
1. For wall mounting, use suitable mounting fittings for the wall
(for example, for a concrete wall, four plugs 6 mm diameter and 30 mm long, 4 screws
3.5 mm diameter and 40 mm long).
2. Connect the electrical cable connecting cables.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
4. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
For more exact dimensions, please refer to the section "Dimension drawings".
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the device.
6.3.2.4 Grounding
S7 standard rail
The device is grounded over its rear panel and the neck of the screw.
Wall mounting
The device is grounded by the securing screw in the unpainted hole.
Please note that the SCALANCE X-100 must be grounded over one securing screw with
minimum resistance.
If a device of the SCALANCE X100 product line is mounted on a non-conducting base, a
grounding cable must be installed. The grounding cable is not supplied with the device.
Connect the paint-free surface of the device to the nearest grounding point using the
grounding cable.
Note
Port monitoring and power supply monitoring are not activated when the device is delivered
(factory default).
Power display
The LEDs signal that the device can adopt the following statuses:
The status of the power supply is indicated by two green LEDs or one green/yellow LED:
Device type SCALANCE LED lit green LED lit yellow LED flashes yellow
Number of port
LEDs
X104-2 6 port LEDs 1 2 3
X106-1 7 port LEDs 1 2 3
X108 8 port LEDs 1 2 3
X112-2 14 port LEDs 1 2 3
X116 16 port LEDs 1 2 3
X124 24 port LEDs 1 2 3
1. TP link exists, no data reception.
2. TP link, data received at TP port.
3. Setting or display of the fault mask.
Power supply
The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block.
The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the
higher output voltage supplies the device alone. The power supply is connected over a high
resistance with the enclosure to allow an ungrounded set up. The two power supplies are
non-floating.
WARNING
The device is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage. This means that only
safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can be
connected to the power supply terminals.
The power supply unit for the device power supply must meet NEC Class 2, as described
by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70).
The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source
with limited power (LPS limited power source).
If the device is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies), both
must meet these requirements.
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra-low
voltage (SELV), 24 V DC).
Never connect the device to AC voltage.
Never operate the device with DC voltage higher than 32 V DC.
Signaling contact
The signaling contact (relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be
signaled by breaking the contact.
The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
SCALANCE X-100
Pin number Assignment
Pin 1 F1
Pin 2 F2
The following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port.
● The failure of one of the two monitored power supplies.
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
● SCALANCE X200-4PIRT
● SCALANCE X201-3PIRT
● SCALANCE X202-2PIRT
● SCALANCE X204-2
● SCALANCE X206-1
● SCALANCE X208
● SCALANCE X204-2LD
● SCALANCE X206-1LD
● SCALANCE S602
● SCALANCE S612
● SCALANCE S613
5 50
5
115
The schematic below shows the minimum bending radii for an optical cable including
connector (external cable with 150 mm radius) and an IE FC cable with IE FC RJ-45
Plug 180 (inner cable with 76 mm radius).
See also
Dimension drawing X-200 (Page 270)
Device type Attachment of end Connecting end devices Connector for power Connector for
SCALANCE devices or network or network components supply signaling contact
components over over fiber-optic
twisted pair
X104-2 4 x RJ-45 jacks with 2 x 2 BFOC sockets 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning (100 Mbps, full duplex to terminal block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full 100BaseFX)
duplex)
X106-1 6 x RJ-45 jacks with 1 x 2 BFOC sockets 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning (100 Mbps, full duplex to terminal block block
10/100 Mbps (half/full 100BaseFX)
duplex)
X108 8 x RJ-45 jacks with - 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning terminal block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
X112-2 12 x RJ-45 jacks with 2 x 2 BFOC sockets 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning 10/100 (100 Mbps, full duplex to terminal block block
Mbps (half/full duplex) 100BaseFX)
X116 16 x RJ-45 jacks with - 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning terminal block block
10/100 Mbps (half/full
duplex)
X124 24 x RJ-45 jacks with - 1 x 4-pin plug-in 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning terminal block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
Device type Power supply Power loss at Current consumption Overcurrent protection at
SCALANCE 2 x 24 V DC 24 V DC at rated voltage input
(18-32 V DC) PTC resettable fuse
(0.6 A / 60 V)
Safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
X104-2 + 4.2 W 175 mA +
X106-1 + 3.6 W 150 mA +
X108 + 3.36 W 140 mA +
X112-2 + 10.8 W 450 mA -
X116 + 7.2 W 300 mA -
X124 + 10.8 W 450 mA -
Device type Operating Storage/transport Relative humidity in Operating altitude at max. xx°C
SCALANCE temperature temperature operation ambient temperature
X104-2 -10 °C through +60 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X106-1 -10 °C through +60 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X108 -20 °C through +70 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X112-2 -10 °C through +70 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X116 -20 °C through +70 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X124 -20 °C through +70 -40 °C through ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
°C +80 °C (no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
Order number
IE FC Stripping Tool 6GK1901-1GA00
IE FC blade cassettes 6GK1901-1GB00
IE FC TP standard cable GP 6XV1840-2AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable 6XV1840-3AH10
IE FC TP marine cable 6XV1840-4AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 6XV1870-2D
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 6XV1870-2B
IE TP torsion cable 6XV1870-2F
FO FRNC Cable 50/125 6XV1 873-2B
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 1 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 10 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 50 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
Note
The number of SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet Switches connected in a line influences the
frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through devices of the SCALANCE X-100 product line, it is delayed by
the store and forward function of the switch
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more devices of the SCALANCE X-100 product line, the frame passes
through, the longer the frame delay.
Certifications
Table 6-20 Approvals for SCALANCE media converters X101-1, X101-1LD, X101-1POF, X101-1FL
and X101-1AUI
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Display elements
The following LEDs exist on all SCALANCE X-100 media converters and in the same
numbers:
● Fault indicator (red LED); Labeled: F): This is lit if one of the two redundant power
supplies fails and/or if there is a link down on a monitored port. The signaling contact
opens at the same time.
● Power indicator (green LED); Labeled: L): This is lit when an adequate power supply is
connected to at least one of the power supply terminals. The LED goes off if the supplied
power drops below 14 V at both inputs.
● Transparent Link indicator (green LED); Labeled: TL): This is lit when transparent link is
set. It is not lit in standalone mode; in other words when end devices are attached to both
ports of the media converter (no cascading).
The status of the ports is indicated by two LEDs:
Operator controls
The media converters have a button with which the set fault mask can be displayed and
modified and with which the transparent link mode can be set.
After pressing the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for approximately 3
seconds. The LEDs of the monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
If the button remains pressed, the new fault mask is displayed after the 3 seconds have
elapsed. The flashing frequency is reduced to 2.5 Hz. After a further 3 seconds, the new fault
mask is adopted and saved. The monitored ports are indicated by permanently lit LEDs until
the button is released.
As long as the LEDs are still flashing, the saving of the mask can be interrupted by releasing
the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored) or you want to set an empty mask, the 2
port LEDs flash on and off alternately.
At the same time, you can also set the monitoring of the redundant power supply with the
fault mask. Monitoring of the power supply is activated only when both power supplies are
connected when the fault mask is stored.
The factory default is no port monitoring.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
Oben / Top
257
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Overview
The following tables apply to the SCALANCE X models
● X200-4PIRT
● X201-3PIRT
● X202-2IRT, X202-2PIRT
● X204IRT, X204-2, X204-2LD
● X206-1, X206-1LD
● X208, X208PRO
● X212-2, X212-2LD
● X216
● X224
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
Except for X208PRO: Tested to IP65.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
X208 X208PRO X216 X224 X204-2 X206-1 X212-2 X204-2 X206-1 X212-2
LD LD LD
P1, P2 P1, P2 P1, P2 P1, P2 P5, P6 P1, P2 P1, P2 P5, P6 P1, P2 P1, P2
X202-2IRT X204IRT X204IRT PRO X202-2P IRT PRO X202-2P IRT X201-3P IRT X200-4P IRT
P3, P4 P1, P2 P1, P2 P3, P4 P3, P4 P3, P4 P3, P4
On a SCALANCE X-200, these ports are enabled as ring ports when the module is supplied.
Without deactivating them, they can also be used as normal ports, for example, in a tree
structure.
The ports of a SCALANCE X-200 that will be used as ring ports must be configured using
the WBM if they are not default ring ports.
Button function
Using the button, you can display and modify the set fault mask. The fault mask setting is
retained after device power off/on.
After pressing and holding down the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for
approximately 3 seconds. The LEDs of the monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
To change the fault mask, keep the button pressed. After a further 3 seconds, the current
link status of the ports is displayed and the the power supply LEDs flash at a frequency of
2.5 Hz. Keep the button pressed. After a further 3 seconds, this status is adopted and saved
as the new fault mask. The monitored ports now are indicated by permanently lit LEDs until
the button is released. As long as the LEDs are still flashing, however, the saving of the
mask can be stopped by releasing the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored) or you want to set an empty mask, the 2
port LEDs flash on and off alternately.
At the same time, the monitoring of the connected power supply is set with the fault mask.
The existence of the two power sources is monitored only if they are connected when the
fault mask is saved.
The failure of the link of one of the monitored ports or one of the monitored power supplies is
indicated by the red fault LED lighting up. At the same time, the signaling contact opens.
Port monitoring and power supply monitoring are not activated when the device is delivered
(factory default), the redundancy manager is disabled.
The following applies to IE Switches X-200 (except SCALANCE X208 PRO): If the button is
pressed for 2-3 seconds longer, the RM LED starts to flash for approx. 2 seconds. If the
button is released during this time, the RM is disabled. If you hold down the button, the RM
LED lights up permanently and the RM is enabled. If the button is pressed longer (15
seconds), the device is reset to "factory defaults". This is indicated by all the Port LEDs
(green) flashing. During this activity, the device must not be turned off.
Note
On the SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO, SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO and SCALANCE X208
PRO, the button is beneath the C-PLUG cover on the rear of the device.
Device type SCALANCE LED lit red LED flashing red LED not lit
X208 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X208PRO 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X216 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X224 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X204-2 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X206-1 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X212-2 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X204-2 LD 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X206-1 LD 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X212-2LD 1, 2, 3, 4 9 10
X202-2IRT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 9 10
X204IRT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 9 10
X204 IRT PRO 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 9 10
X202-2P IRT PRO 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 9 10
X202-2P IRT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 9 10
X201-3P IRT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 9 10
X200-4P IRT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 9 10
Note
SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO and SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO have no redundant
power supply.
3. C-PLUG
4. Device startup, the LED is lit for approx. 20 seconds.
5. Device is in PROFINET mode:
– a) There is no connection to the controller
– b) There is a connection to the controller, there is also a configured diagnostic
interrupt, for example power fail interrupt, C-PLUG interrupt etc.
6. Redundancy manager connected through.
7. Switchover of standby connection.
8. Maintenance request or maintenance requirement.
9. An internal fault was detected. Inform the maintenance personnel and, if necessary, send
the device in for repair.
10.No fault detected by the IE Switch X-200.
Power display
The LEDs signal that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses:
The status of the power supply is indicated by two green LEDs or one green/yellow LED:
Device type Green LED lit Yellow-green LED LED not lit
SCALANCE
LED lit green LED lit yellow
X208 - 2 3 4
X208PRO 1 - - 4
X216 - 2 3 4
X224 - 2 3 4
X204-2 - 2 3 4
X206-1 - 2 3 4
X212-2 - 2 3 4
X204-2 LD - 2 3 4
X206-1 LD - 2 3 4
X212-2LD - 2 3 4
X202-2IRT - 2 3 4
X204IRT - 2 3 4
X204 IRT PRO - 2 3 4
X202-2P IRT PRO - 2 3 4
X202-2P IRT - 2 3 4
X201-3P IRT - 2 3 4
X200-4P IRT - 2 3 4
Note
SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO and SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO have no redundant
power supply.
Device type SCALANCE LED lit green LED lit yellow LED flashes LED flashes
yellow green
Number of port
LEDs
X208 8 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X208PRO 8 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5
X204-2 6 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X206-1 7 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X204-2 LD 6 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X206-1 LD 7 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X202-2IRT 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X204IRT 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X204 IRT PRO 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X202-2P IRT PRO 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X202-2P IRT 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X201-3P IRT 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X200-4P IRT 4 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X216 16 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X212-2 14 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X212-2LD 14 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
X224 24 port LEDs 1 2, 3 4 5, 6
Device type SCALANCE LED lit green LED flashes green LED not lit
X208 1 2 3
X208PRO - - -
X216 1 2 3
X224 1 2 3
X204-2 1 2 3
X206-1 1 2 3
X212-2 1 2 3
X204-2LD 1 2 3
X206-1LD 1 2 3
X212-2LD 1 2 3
X202-2IRT 1 2 3
X204IRT 1 2 3
X204 IRT PRO 1 2 3
X202-2P IRT PRO 1 2 3
X202-2P IRT 1 2 3
X201-3P IRT 1 2 3
X200-4P IRT 1 2 3
Note
The redundancy manager indicator and the standby indicator are implemented as a dual
LED, the indicator color changes depending on the function (Redundancy function ->
green, standby function -> yellow).
Device type SCALANCE LED lit yellow LED flashes yellow LED flashes yellow LED not lit
(slowly) (fast)
X208 - - - -
X208PRO - - - -
X216 - - - -
X224 - - - -
X204-2 - - - -
X206-1 - - - -
X212-2 - - - -
X204-2 LD - - - -
X206-1 LD - - - -
X212-2LD - - - -
X202-2IRT 1 2 3 4
X204IRT 1 2 3 4
X204 IRT PRO 1 2 3 4
X202-2P IRT PRO 1 2 3 4
X202-2P IRT 1 2 3 4
X201-3P IRT 1 2 3 4
X200-4P IRT 1 2 3 4
Note
When the device switches from active to passive mode because of a fault, the red fault
LED is also activated. This is possible only when standby monitoring is enabled in the
fault mask.
Note
Only the SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, X202-2P IRT PRO, X201-3P IRT and X200-4P IRT
devices have the FO cable diagnostic display.
Device type SCALANCE When the device starts up, the following LEDs light up in the following order:
1. Power LEDs (green) light up immediately after turning on the power.
2. Port LEDs (yellow) light up for approx. 6 seconds, the red LED is off.
3. Port LEDs go off, the red error LED is lit for approx. 20 seconds.
4. After the port LEDs go off, the correct link status is displayed after approx. 2 seconds.
5. The IE Switch X-200 is now ready for operation.
X208 +
X208PRO +
X216 +
X224 +
X204-2 +
X206-1 +
X212-2 +
X204-2 LD +
X206-1 LD +
X212-2LD +
X202-2IRT +
X204IRT +
X204 IRT PRO +
X202-2P IRT PRO +
X202-2P IRT +
X201-3P IRT +
X200-4P IRT +
General
The pin assignment of the SCALANCE X-200 devices is the same as with other SCALANCE
X devices.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
See also
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings (Page 244)
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X-200 devices without optical interface and with interface
for multimode FO cable
Order numbers
Note
You will find information on configuring the SCALANCE X switches using Web Based
Management in the relevant operating instructions.
Validity
The following information applies to the SCALANCE X devices
● X310
● X308-2
● X308-2LD
Approvals
Device type c-UL-us c-UL-us for hazardous FM1 C-TICK CE ATEX Zone 21 E1
SCALANCE locations1
X310 UL UL 1604, UL FM 3611 AS/NZS EN 61000-6-4 EN60079-15 ECE-G
60950-1 2279Pt.15 CL.1, Div.2 2064 Class A, II 3 G EEx nA II T.. 95/54/EEC
CSA CL.1, Div.2 GP. GP. A.B.C.D (Class A). EN 61000-6-2 KEMA 03 ATEX
C22.2 No. A.B.C.D T.. T.. 1226 X test number
60950-1 CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC, CL.1, Zone 2, 024734
T.. GP. IIC, T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC Ta:..
IIC T..
X308-2 UL UL 1604, UL FM 3611 AS/NZS EN 61000-6-4 EN60079-15 -
60950-1 2279Pt.15 CL.1, Div.2 2064 Class A, II 3 G EEx nA II T..
CSA CL.1, Div.2 GP. GP. A.B.C.D (Class A). EN 61000-6-2 KEMA 03 ATEX
C22.2 No. A.B.C.D T.. T.. 1226 X
60950-1 CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC, CL.1, Zone 2,
T.. GP. IIC, T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC Ta:..
IIC T..
X308-2 LD UL UL 1604, UL FM 3611 AS/NZS EN 61000-6-4 EN60079-15 -
60950-1 2279Pt.15 CL.1, Div.2 2064 Class A, II 3 G EEx nA II T..
CSA CL.1, Div.2 GP. GP. A.B.C.D (Class A). EN 61000-6-2 KEMA 03 ATEX
C22.2 No. A.B.C.D T.. T.. 1226 X
60950-1 CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC, CL.1, Zone 2,
T.. GP. IIC, T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC Ta:..
IIC T..
1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
Order numbers
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Overview
The following table shows the states indicated by the LEDs in the various display modes.
The following table lists the significance of the three LEDs on the IE Switch X-300 for display
modes A through C:
Figure 6-23 LED Fault / Power and System display in display mode D
The following table shows the meaning of the three LEDs on the IE Switch X-300 in display
mode D:
System
On the IE Switch X-300, the LEDs of the system are on the right-hand LED strip.
The individual functions (RM, SB and DM) are independent of each other. The LED displays
are described below:
Note
If there is a link fault and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), in DMode B,
the desired status, in other words the set transmission rate (1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 10
Mbps) continues to be displayed. If there is a link fault and autonegotiation is active, the port
LED goes off.
Note
If there is a link fault and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), in DMode C,
the desired status, in other words the set type of transmission (full or half duplex) continues
to be displayed. If there is a link fault and autonegotiation is active, the port LED goes off.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
Figure 6-29 Dimension drawing SCALANCE X-300 (here based on the example of the SCALANCE X308-2)
Device type Attachment of end devices Connecting end devices or Connector for power Connector for
SCALANCE or network components network components over supply signaling contact
over twisted pair fiber-optic
X310 7 x RJ-45 sockets with - 1x4-pin plug-in terminal 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
3 x RJ-45 sockets with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
X308-2 7 x RJ-45 sockets with 2 SC duplex sockets 1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning (1000 Mbps, full duplex to block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full 1000BaseSX)
duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
X308-2 LD 7 x RJ-45 sockets with 2 SC duplex sockets 1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
MDI-X pinning (1000 Mbps, full duplex to block block
10/100 Mbps (half/ full 1000BaseLX)
duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
Device type Power supply Power loss at Current consumption Overcurrent protection at
SCALANCE 2 x 24 V DC 24 V DC at rated voltage input
(18-32 V DC) Non-replaceable fuse
(F 3 A / 32 V)
Safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
X310 + 9.6 W 400 mA +
X308-2 + 9.6 W 400 mA +
X308-2 LD + 9.6 W 400 mA +
Note
Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB per SC connector.
Device type Operating temperature Storage/transport Relative humidity in Operating altitude at max. xx°C
SCALANCE temperature operation ambient temperature
X310 0 °C through +60 °C -40 °C through +70 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
(no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X308-2 0 °C through +60 °C -40 °C through +70 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
(no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
X308-2 LD 0 °C through +60 °C -40 °C through +70 °C ‹ 95 % 2000 m at max. 56 °C
(no condensation) 3000 m at max. 50 °C
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through an IE Switch X-300, it is delayed by the Store&Forward
function of the IE Switch X-300
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more IE Switch X-300 devices the frame passes through, the longer the
frame delay.
Certifications
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
Order numbers
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
SCALANCE X-400 products are designed for installation in switching cubicles and have
degree of protection IP20. The installation width of the X408-2 basic device is 9 inches.
The SCALANCE X408-2 basic device consists of a basic module with the following
permanently installed modules:
● Slot 2: A power supply module for supplying the SCALANCE X408-2 with 24 V DC;
redundant 24 V supply is possible. The module also provides a floating signal output for
simple display of disruptions.
● Slot 3: A dummy module for the following LED displays: RM, STBY, DM1, DM2.
Slots 4 and 7 are covered by dummy modules and have no function.
The following ports are located on the basic module:
● Slots 5 and 6: Each slots for an optical Fast Ethernet media module each with 2 ports.
● In slots 5 and 6: Each with two RJ-45 jacks allowing connection of electrical (twisted pair)
connections at 10/100/1000 Mbps.
As an option, slots 5 and 6 can be used for an optical gigabit module with two ports.
● In slot 8: Four RJ-45 jacks for electrical (twisted pair) connections (10, 100 Mbps). These
cannot be used by media modules. Here, there is also a D-sub socket (RS-232) as
configuration and diagnostics port.
Figure 6-32 Basic device without media modules, protective caps and covers
The SCALANCE X414-3E consists of a frame with basic module. This has the following slot
numbering:
Figure 6-33 Basic device X414-3E without media modules with existing ports
● Slot 2: A power supply module for supplying the SCALANCE X414-3E with 24 V DC;
redundant 24 V supply is possible. The module also provides a floating signal output for
simple display of disruptions.
● Slot 3: A module with 8 floating inputs for acquiring digital status information, such as
signaling contacts from PROFIBUS OLMs or door contacts and forwarding via
SCALANCE X-400 diagnostics methods (LED display, log table, trap or E-mail)
● Slot 4: A CPU module responsible for the management of the SCALANCE X414-3E
The following ports are located on the basic module:
● In slot 5: Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps, RJ-45
jacks) for interconnecting the SCALANCE X-400 switches. Slot for an optical gigabit
Ethernet media module with 2 ports; when this module is inserted, the two RJ-45 gigabit
Ethernet twisted-pair ports on the same slots cannot be used.
● Slots 6 and 7: Each slots for an optical Fast Ethernet media module each with 2 ports.
● In slots 9 to 11: 12 integrated Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10 or 100 Mbps, RJ-45
jacks),
● An extender expansion port
Using this extender expansion port, the X414-3E can be expanded with the twisted-pair
extender EM495-8 by a further 8 Fast Ethernet ports:
6&$/$1&( &RYHU &RYHU [ &RYHU &RYHU &RYHU [ [ [ [ [
;
) ,1,1 50 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 67%< 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 '0 3 3 3 3 3
,1,1 '0 3 3 3 3 3
3RZHU0RGXOH
0%LWV
&380RGXOH
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0%LWV
0%LWV
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
8QXVHG
0RGXOH
[5-
[5-
[5-
[5-
6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW
Using the media module extender EM496-4, an expansion of 4 ports for media modules is
possible, so that up to 8 optical Fast Ethernet ports (100 Mbps) are available:
6&$/$1&( &RYHU &RYHU [ &RYHU &RYHU &RYHU [ [ [ [ [ [ [
;
) ,1,1 50 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 67%< 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 '0 3 3 3
,1,1 '0 3 3 3
3RZHU0RGXOH
0%LWV
&380RGXOH
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0%LWV
0%LWV
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
8QXVHG
0RGXOH
[5-
[5-
[5-
[5-
6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW
Serial port
The CPU module of the SCALANCE X414-3E has an RS-232 port. This is used for the
following purposes:
● Firmware updates
● Management with the aid of the command interpreter (Command Line Interpreter, CLI)
including setting of the IP address information.
Input to the command interpreter is over command lines.
For more detailed information, refer to the Configuration Manual - SCALANCE X-400
Industrial Ethernet Switches.
Notes on installation
IE Switches X-400 are designed for installation on an S7-300 standard rail and installation on
a 35 mm DIN rail.
You will find general information on this in the section on installing SCALANCE X-100
devices.
Clearances
Certain minimum clearances between an IE Switch X-400 and neighboring equipment must
be taken into account. These minimum clearances are necessary during installation and
operation to allow the following:
● Install and remove modules,
● To allow the flow of air required for heat dissipation during operation of the IE Switches X-
400.
The following figure shows the space you need to allow for an IE Switch X-400.
PP
PP
PP
PP
Figure 6-36 Installation clearances for the IE Switches X-400 based on the example of a SCALANCE X414-3E with
extender module
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
CAUTION
If the IE Switch X-400 is liable to be subjected to severe vibration (> 10 g), use the S7-300
standard rail for installation. The DIN rail does not provide adequate support for the
IE Switch X-400 with vibration greater than 10 g.
Since the two captive screws are not used to secure the device when installing on a 35 mm
DIN rail, it is not absolutely necessary to remove the covers and the blind cover, although
this does make it easier to handle the basic device.
NOTICE
When installing the IE Switch X-400, hold it by the backplane and not by the modules,
otherwise the device may be damaged.
Note
Only horizontal installation permitted (ventilation slit top/bottom).
NOTICE
When uninstalling the SCALANCE X414-3E, hold it by the backplane and not by the
modules, otherwise the device may be damaged.
NOTICE
When uninstalling the SCALANCE X408-2, hold it by the backplane and not by the
modules, otherwise the device may be damaged.
SCALANCE X414-3E: 5
SCALANCE X408-2: 5 and 6
● CV490 2x100
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 6, 7 and extender module EM496-4 slots 12 through 15
● CV490 4x100
10/100 Mbps, electrical transmission, 4 port displays
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 9 through 11 and extender module EM495-8 slots 12, 13
SCALANCE X408-2: 8
There is a dummy cover
● CV490 COVER
(no displays connected to front)
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 8
SCALANCE X408-2: 4 and 7
Display elements:
Depending on the display mode, the LEDs have the following meaning. To set the display
mode, press the SELECT / SET button on the CPU module until the DM1 and DM2 LEDs
light up on the CPU in the required combination. The selected display mode is then
activated. There is an automatic switchover to Dmode A if the button is not pressed for
longer than one minute.
The following table shows the states indicated by the LEDs in the various display modes.
You will find detailed information in the Operating Instructions SCALANCE X-400 Industrial
Ethernet Switches.
Function
The SELECT / SET button is used to switch over the display modes (DMode) and to make
other settings. After turning on the IE Switch X-400, it is in DMode A.
The button has the following functions:
● Changing the display modes
By pressing the button briefly, you change from one display mode to the next. The
selected mode or current status is displayed by the LEDs (D1, D2).
● Resetting to the factory defaults
It is possible to restore some of the factory defaults in DMode A. You do this by pressing
the button for 12 seconds. You can cancel the reset procedure by releasing the button
before the 12 seconds have elapsed. All previously made settings are overwritten by the
factory defaults.
● Defining the fault mask and the LED displays
It is possible to set the fault mask in DMode A and DMode D. This allows you to specify
the mask for signaling faults by defining an individual "good status" for the connected
ports and the power supplies. In this case, you press the button for 5 seconds in DMode
A or DMode D. After 3 seconds, the two LEDs (D1 and D2) start to flash. You can cancel
the procedure by releasing the button before the 5 seconds have elapsed. If, however,
you press the button for a further 2 seconds, the current states of all ports and the states
of the power supplies L1 and L2 are included in the fault mask. The previous fault mask is
then overwritten.
● Activating/deactivating the redundancy manager
It is only possible to activate/deactivate the RM in DMode B. You do this by pressing the
button for 5 seconds. After 3 seconds, the two LEDs (D1 and D2) start to flash. If you
release the button before the 5 seconds have elapsed, the action is aborted. After 5
seconds the redundancy manager is activated/deactivated. If the redundancy manager as
well as ring redundancy were deactivated, ring redundancy is also activated at the same
time. If you deactivate, only the redundancy manager is deactivated.
Note
Only the SCALANCE X414-3E basic device has DIL switches.
Ring redundancy can be configured with these DIL switches. These settings are made in the
software for the SCALANCE X408-2 basic device. On the SCALANCE X408-2, the RM can
also be enabled / disabled with the SET/SELECT button. For more detailed information, refer
to the configuration manual "SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet
Switches".
Changing the switch settings during operation causes fault displays and activates the
signaling contact. The settings are adopted only after the device is restarted.
Configuration options
Below the labeling strip on the CPU module on slot 4, there are four DIL switches. These DIL
switches can have one of two states (ON / OFF).
Figure 6-39 Power module, digital inputs and CPU module with operator controls on the SCALANCE
X414-3E
NOTICE
When supplied, the DIL switches R1 and R2 on the SCALANCE X414-3E are set to OFF.
As a result, the gigabit ports on slot 5 are defined as ring ports and ring redundancy is
therefore enabled. In this case, you cannot enable rapid spanning tree / spanning tree.
For more detailed information, refer to the configuration manual "SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches".
If R1 and R2 are set to OFF, the two gigabit ports of slot 5 are selected as ring ports.
Note
If the SCALANCE X414-3E is operated without media modules, R1 and R2 must be set to
OFF, otherwise ports in slots 6 and 7 will be defined as ring ports that are only available
when media modules are plugged in.
6&$/$1&( &RYHU &RYHU [ &RYHU &RYHU &RYHU [ [ [
;
) ,1,1 50 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 67%< 3 3 3 3 3 3
/ ,1,1 '0 3 3 3
,1,1 '0 3 3 3
3RZHU0RGXOH
0%LWV
&380RGXOH
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0%LWV
0%LWV
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
7ZLVWHG3DLU
8QXVHG
0RGXOH
[5-
[5-
[5-
[5-
6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW 6ORW
Figure 6-40 Ring ports that can be defined with switches R1 and R2
Note
Only two ports of a switch can ever be defined as ring ports. All other ports in slots 6 and 7
that are not defined as ring ports can be used for the optical connection of nodes or subnets.
● Switch 1:
In the schematic below, switches R1 and R2 are set to OFF.
● Switch 2:
In the schematic below, switch R1 is set to ON and R2 to OFF.
● Switch 3:
In the schematic below, switch R1 is set to OFF and R2 to ON.
Figure 6-41 The three possible settings for ring ports with R1 and R2
;( ;
$ % % % 6
3&
%
$ P
% P
With the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 1GE, the eight-wire FastConnect cable allows a
transmission rate of 1 Gbps.
With the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 2FE, the eight-wire FastConnect cable is split
over two RJ-45 jacks and allows a transmission rate of 2 x 100 Mbps.
The maximum segment length of 100 m also applies when using the FastConnect cabling
with TP cord. Normally, FastConnect cable with a length of 90 m is used. The remaining 10
m is then available for TP cord at both ends (total of 10 m).
;( ;
$ $ $ $
6
,()&5- ,()&5-
0RGXODU 0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW 2XWOHW,QVHUW
*( )( % $ $
,()&5-0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW)( ;(
% $
,()&5-0RGXODU
$$ P 2XWOHW,QVHUW*(
$%$ P
NOTICE
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps.
NOTICE
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps.
Figure 6-48 BFOC plug with Fast Ethernet media module MM491-2
/ 0 0 /
CAUTION
If IE Switches X-400 are supplied over long 24 V power supply lines or networks, measures
are necessary to prevent interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines.
These can result, for example, due to lightning or switching of large inductive loads.
One of the tests used to attest the immunity of devices of the IE Switches X-400 to
electromagnetic interference is the "surge immunity test" according to EN61000-4-5. This
test requires overvoltage protection for the power supply lines. A suitable device is, for
example, the Dehn Blitzductor VT AD 24 V type no. 918 402 or comparable protective
element.
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans-Dehn-Str.1, Postfach 1640, D-92306
Neumarkt, Germany.
6.7.6.4 Connectors of the signaling contact and grounding strap (X2) of the SCALANCE X-400
By inserting a strap between protective earth GND and M3, IE Switches X-400 can be
operated with grounded reference potential.
When the device ships, no strap is fitted (non-grounded reference potential).
Ports
Digital inputs 5 through 8 are connected using a 5-pin connector at the rear terminal block on
the DI module.
6.7.6.6 Note
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
242
Interfaces
C-PLUG
Cascading depth
Switching properties
Construction
Note
Installing a Fast Ethernet media module is the same in the IE Switch X-400 and in the media
module extender.
1. Remove the cover from the slot of the media module and remove the protective cap of
the module terminal strip underneath from the backplane of the basic device.
Note
Keep these parts in a safe place in case you want to remove the media module later.
2. Remove the inserted labeling strip from the front of the media module.
3. Place the two lower guides of the media module into the recesses at the lower edge of
the basic device. It should no longer be possible to move the media module to the side.
4. Tilt the media module at an angle towards the back until the two plastic pins at the back
top edge of the media module jut into the recesses in the basic device. The terminal strip
of the media module must fit into the guide in the backplane.
5. Press the upper part of the media module onto the basic device until the fluted middle
section of the media module is heard to click into place.
6. Tighten the captive screw on the front of the media module with a slotted screwdriver with
a 2.8 mm wide blade.
7. Secure the labeling strip on the front of the media module.
Note
Removing a Fast Ethernet media module is the same in the IE Switch X-400 and in the
media module extender.
1. Remove the inserted labeling strip from the front of the media module.
2. Release the captive screw on the front of the media module as far as it will go with a
slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
3. Press on the fluted middle section of the top of the media module next to the backplane.
4. At the same time, tilt the media module down at an angle, the two guides initially remain
in the recesses at the lower edge of the basic device.
5. Remove the media module by pulling it upwards.
6. Fit the protective cap on the module terminal strip on the backplane of the
basic device. Fit a suitable cover on the slot of the media module.
Note
Make sure that in addition to the extender width of 87 mm (EM495-8) or 155 mm (EM496-
4), there is a clearance of 20 mm to the right of the basic device on the standard rail to be
able to align the guide bolts of the extender with the holes in the basic device during
installation.
Note
Protective caps and CV490 2x100 covers must be fitted to all slots without media
modules.
When installing an extender module on an S7-300 standard rail, the basic device remains in
position. Follow the steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Remove the right-hand side panel of the basic device. To do this, use a slotted
screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws on slot 11 in
the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Remove the side panel of the basic device from the basic device to the right.
Note
Keep the panel in a safe place in case the extender needs to be removed again later.
Then push the extender module to the left as far as it will go so that it is flush with the
right side of the basic device.
7. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade, tighten the captive screw between
slots 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or 13 and 14 (EM496-4) in the lower part of the extender
module.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit the CV490 4x100 cover on slot 11 of the basic device. Make sure that the unused
slots have protective caps and covers CV490 2x100 fitted to them.
Figure 6-59 Installing the twisted pair extender on the S7-300 standard rail
4. Use a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws
on slot 11 of the basic device in the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
5. Push the extender module slowly to the right while keeping it straight until the two guide
bolts of the extender module are completely outside the holes in the basic device.
6. Pull out the lower part of the extender module slightly towards the front and lift it from the
S7-300 standard rail.
7. Replace the right side panel of the basic device so that the guide bolts fit into the two
holes in the basic device.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit a suitable cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Note
The basic device must not be used permanently without the right side panel.
CAUTION
If the IE Switch X-400 with extender is liable to severe vibration (> 10 g), use the S7-300
standard rail for installation. The DIN rail does not provide adequate support for the
extender modules with vibration greater than 10 g.
For installation, you require a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
Although the captive screw in the lower part between slots 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or 13 and
14 (EM496-4) of the extender module is not used when installing on a 35 mm DIN rail, it is
nevertheless advisable to remove the media modules.
Note
Make sure that in addition to the extender width of 87 mm (EM495-8) or 155 mm (EM496-4),
there is a clearance of 20 mm to the right of the basic device on the DIN rail to be able to
align the guide bolts of the extender with the holes in the basic device during installation.
Note
Protective caps and CV490 2x100 covers must be fitted to all slots without media modules.
When installing an extender module on a 35 mm DIN rail, the basic device remains in
position. Follow the steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Remove the right-hand side panel of the basic device. To do this, use a slotted
screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws on slot 11 in
the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Remove the side panel of the basic device from the basic device to the right.
Note
Keep the panel in a safe place in case the extender needs to be removed again later.
4. Place the central groove containing a spring clip on the back of the extender module on
the upper edge of the DIN rail with the module tilted slightly towards the back. Make sure
that there is adequate clearance between the guide bolts of the extender module and the
basic device.
5. The spring clip must be located behind the edge of the DIN rail so that it is visible from
the rear of the frame.
6. Press the extender module down and push in the lower part until you hear it click into
place in the DIN rail.
7. Push the extender module slowly to the left while keeping it straight and without skewing
and check that the two guide bolts on the extender fit into the holes in the basic device.
Then push the extender module to the left as far as it will go so that it is flush with the
right side of the basic device.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit the CV490 4x100 cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Figure 6-60 Installing the twisted pair extender on the 35 mm DIN rail
extender module from a 35 mm DIN rail, the basic device remains in position. Follow the
steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Use a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws
on slot 11 of the basic device in the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Push the extender module slowly to the right while keeping it straight until the two guide
bolts of the extender module are completely outside the holes in the basic device.
4. Push the extender module down until the lower part can be pulled away from the rail to
the front.
5. Lift the extender module up and off the DIN rail.
6. Replace the right side panel of the basic device so that the guide bolts fit into the two
holes in the basic device.
7. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
8. Fit a suitable cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Note
The basic device must not be used permanently without the right side panel.
Front
Side
Front
Side
EM495-8 EM496-4
Power consumption < 0.5 W < 0.1 W
Transmission rate 10/100 Mbps 100 Mbps
Interference emission EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity EN 61000-6-2
MTBF > 130 years > 140 years > 400 years > 400 years
EM495-8 EM496-4
Operating temperature 0 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport temperature -40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation < 95% (no condensation)
EM495-8 EM496-4
Operating altitude 2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to IP20
EM495-8 EM496-4
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 86 x 145 x 112.5 mm 154 x 145 x 112.4 mm
Weight 560 g 980 g
Certifications
SCALANCE W-788/W740-PRO/RR
c-UL-us (Information UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Technology Equipment)
c-UL-us for hazardous locations UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and Non
Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
(T* = For concrete information on the temperature class, refer to
the type plate)
FM FM 3611
FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and Non
Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
(T* = For concrete information on the temperature class, refer to
the type plate)
SCALANCE W-788/W740-PRO/RR
CE The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2RR
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D conform to the
regulations of the following European directive:
99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council relating to
Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
and the Mutual Recognition of their Conformity.
Conformity with the essential requirements of the directive
is attested by adherence to the following standards:
EN 60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 301489-1
Electromagnetic Compatibility for Radio Equipment and Services
EN 301489-17
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems
and for equipment in local high-performance radio networks
(HIPERLAN)
EN 300328
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Issues
EN 301893
Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz high-
performance RLAN
EN 50371
Compliance of low power electronic and electrical apparatus with
the basic restrictions related to human exposure to
electromagnetic fields (10 MHz to 300 GHz)
1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the
general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety
regulations.
ATEX Zone 2 * EN 50021
WARNING
* ATEX Zone 2
When used under hazardous conditions (Zone 2), the SCALANCE W78x product must be
installed in an enclosure. To comply with EN 50021, this enclosure must meet the
requirements of at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE
ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
Order numbers
Degree of protection
Tested to IP65.
CAUTION
Premature aging of the device and cables due to UV radiation
Provide suitable shade to protect the device against direct sunlight. This avoids unwanted
heating of the device and prevents premature aging of the device and cabling. When
operating the SCALANCE W outdoors, it must be mounted so that it is protected from UV.
UV radiation can discolor the front panel of the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR or W74x-
1PRO/RR. Discoloring of the front panel does not impair the mechanical stability of the
device. The device must also not be subjected to long periods of rain (provide cover to
protect from rain). The cover should be made of a synthetic material since metal impairs the
radiation of radio waves.
Note
The minimum distance to fluorescent lamps should be 0.5 m. When installed in a cabinet, we
recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on directly neighboring mounting
rails.
Installation
The SCALANCE W has a robust IP65 metal housing optimally designed for installation on an
S7-300 standard rail. With drill holes in the housing, wall mounting is also possible.
Installation on a DIN rail is possible only with additional fittings.
On the back of the device, there is a locking screw below which the receptacle for a C-PLUG
is located. This is used to store the device configuration. If the device develops a fault, the
configuration can be transferred to the replacement device from the C-PLUG without
needing a programming device.
To achieve degree of protection IP65, however, suitable cables and connectors must be
used.
back:
C-PLUG
energy
hybrid
socket wall-
mounting
protective
clip G_IK10_XX_30019
Figure 7-1 Connectors of the SCALANCE W access points and clients (here: W788-1PRO AP)
Suitable cables
The following cable variants are available to connect a SCALANCE W to the power supply
and to Ethernet:
● IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 (order no. 6XV1870-2J)
The two data wire pairs are separately shielded. This cable is particularly suitable for
assembly with the IE IP67 hybrid connector shipped with SCALANCE W. The 4 x 0.34
cables are used to supply power.
● IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP (order no. 6XV1870-2E)
IE FC TP Flexible Cable 4 x 2 GP (order no. 6XV1870-2H -- as spare part only)
In these cable types, two wires are twisted. All four pairs of wires are inside a common
shield. Two of the cable pairs are used to supply power. This cable is also suitable for
assembly with the IE IP67 hybrid connector shipped with SCALANCE W.
● 2 x 2 IE cable, the optional power supply (18 - 32 V DC) is over M12 connectors.
How to fit the connectors and cables is described in the general installation instructions or
the connector pin assignments of the SCALANCE W components.
24 V DC and data 24 V DC and data Redundant 220 V DC and data 48 V DC and data transmission on one
transmission on transmission on 24 V DC and data transmission on line (Power over Ethernet) according to
one line two separate lines transmission on two separate lines IEEE 802.3af
one line
(8-core) (4-core and (8-core and (4-core and (4-core, (8-core)
2-core) 2-core) 3-core) modulated)
G_IK10_XX_30122
Use Installation of only Data and power on Redundant Operation Operation with Power over Ethernet
one line two separate lines power supply with 220 V (PoE)
Figure 7-2 Options for power supply to the SCALANCE W access points and clients
Supplying power
For a 24 V power supply to IP65, the AC/DC power unit PS791-1PRO is particularly suitable.
This is supplied with 115 V AC / 230 V AC (permitted voltage range 90 V AC to 265 V AC).
The generated 24 V DC is available via the supplied cable to the M12 socket of the
SCALANCE W.
If the power is supplied via the IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34, the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
Power Insert (6GK1901-1BE00-0AA3) can be strongly recommended (see also section
IE FC Modular Outlet).
Grounding
There must be no potential difference between the following parts otherwise there is a risk
that the device will be destroyed:
● Ground potential of the power supply and ground potential of the antenna ground.
● Ground potential of the power supply and a grounded housing.
● Ground potential of the power supply and the ground potential of the device connected to
Industrial Ethernet (for example PC, AS-300, AS-400 etc.)
Connect both grounds to the same foundation earth or use an equipotential bonding cable.
Antenna connectors
All SCALANCE W devices have at least two R-SMA antenna connectors and ship with two
ANT795-4MR antennas.
The SCALANCE W788-2PRO and SCALANCE W788-2RR each have two integrated
wireless adapters. They therefore have two additional antenna connectors to which the
additional antennas can be connected to the sides of the housing via antenna connecting
cables.
If the SCALANCE W is installed in a switching cubicle, the antennas must be removed due
to the restricted communication. In this case, the connection is over detached antennas that
must be installed outside the cabinet. On the front panel, there is an identifier for the antenna
connectors. The A connectors are on the right-hand side and B connectors B on the left-
hand side.
SIMATIC NET offers the IWLAN FRNC antenna extension cable for the connection between
the SCALANCE W and a detached antenna. To avoid violating the approvals, only antennas
released for this product can be used.
The distance between a pair of antennas for the first and second WLAN interface must be at
least 0.5 m.
Lightning protection
WARNING
Installing antennas outdoors
Antennas installed outdoors must be within the area covered by a lightning protection
system. Make sure that all conducting systems entering from outdoors can be protected by
a lightning protection potential equalization system.
When implementing your lightning protection concept, make sure you adhere to the VDE
0182 or IEC 62305 standard.
Suitable lightning protectors are available in the range of accessories of SIMATIC NET
Industrial WLAN:
● Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO (with R-SMA connector, order no. 6GK5798-1LP00-
0AA6)
● Lightning protector LP798-1N (with N/N female/female connector, order no. 6GK5798-
2LP00-2AA6)
Installing one of these lightning protectors between an antenna and a SCALANCE W is not
adequate protection against a lightning strike. The LP798-1PRO/N lightening protector only
works within the framework of a comprehensive lightning protection concept. If you have
questions, ask a qualified specialist company.
See also
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices (Page 527)
IE FC Modular Outlet (Page 199)
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 189)
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 188)
Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients
(Page 349)
6&$/$1&(:[[
R1
P1
L1
L2
6&$/$1&(:[[
R1
P1
L1
R2
L2
Note
If the LED for the WLAN port is not green when the device starts up, although it is activated,
the port is not ready for operation (interface not initialized).
The main reason for this is usually that during commissioning of the SCALANCE W78x
products, a waiting time of up to 15 minutes can occur when the ambient temperature is
below zero. The device is ready for operation at the specified ambient temperature as soon
as the LED for the WLAN interface is lit green.
Note
The arrangement and functions of the LEDs on the W-740 clients correspond to those on the
W788-1xx access point.
See also
LEDs on the W-788 (Page 347)
7.1.5 Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients
Table 7-3 Pinning of the hybrid connector for the power supply
X2 Socket
Pin 1 24 V DC
Pin 2 -
Pin 3 Ground
Pin 4 -
If you do not use the hybrid socket, this must be covered with a protective cap, otherwise IP
65 protection is lost. A suitable protective cap is available as an accessory (order no.
6ES7194-1JB10-0XA0). If you do not use the M12 connector, the supplied protective cap
must also be fitted to retain the IP65 degree of protection.
See also
Installation instructions for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR (Page 343)
125
5 115
5
80
90
Figure 7-4 Dimension drawing for SCALANCE W-780 and SCALANCE W-740PRO/RR
The cubicle installation depth with the hybrid cable connected is approx. 230 mm.
Device variants
The technical specifications of the
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1RR
Data transfer
Interfaces
Note
Bridging a power outage is is possible only with an input voltage of 24 V DC (-15% . . .
+20%).
Electrical data
Construction
MTBF 67 years
CE conformity
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-2PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-3PRO
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D meets the regulations of the following
European directives:
● 99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Conformity with the basic requirement of the directive is attested by adherence to the
following standards:
● EN 60950-1
Safety of information technology equipment
● EN 301489-1 V1.6.1
Electromagnetic compatibility for radio equipment and services
● EN 301489-17 V1.2.1
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems and for equipment in
local high-performance wireless networks (HIPERLAN)
● EN 300328 V1.6.1
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum issues
● EN 301893 V1.3.1
Broadband radio access networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz high-performance RLAN
● EN 50385:2002
Generic standard to demonstrate the compliance of low power electronic and electrical
apparatus with the basic restrictions related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields
(110 MHz to 40 GHz)
● 1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety regulations.
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Industrielle Kommunikation
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
This declaration certifies compliance with the directives named above, but does not
guarantee any specific properties.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
Degree of protection
The SCALANCE W-786 access point is certified according to IP65.
Shock resistant plastic housing, UV and salt spray resistant.
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Once you have removed the housing cover, there is the danger from line voltage in the
area of the connecting terminals on the power supply adapter.
Only authorized personnel is permitted to open the device and carry out any work on the
open device (e.g. connection and disconnection of lines, operating the reset button,
replacing the C-PLUG)!
6-3
78
EW
A NC
AL
SC F
R3
R2
R1
P1
PoE
L1
Note
These screws remain in the cover after they have been loosened (prevents them being
lost). Never attempt to remove these screws from the housing cover using force,
otherwise the housing cover will be damaged!
3. Remove the housing cover with the captive screws (position C in the figure above).
A B C
Figure 7-6 Side view of a SCALANCE W786 with cables entering from different directions
● The cables are inserted from above (position A in the previous schematic). The housing
of the SCALANCE W786 has an opening at the top for this purpose.
● The cables are inserted from below (position B in the previous schematic). There is also
an opening at the bottom for this purpose.
● Cables inserted through a wall behind the SCALANCE W786 (position C in the previous
schematic). In this case, you will need to mount the SCALANCE W786 so that the
opening in the wall is located above the lower edge of the device.
Connecting up FO cables
Fiber-optic cables have a minimum bending radius. The cable must not be bent tighter than
this bending radius during installation or operation, otherwise the FO cable will be irreperably
damaged.
m m
R > 25
R*
Figure 7-7 Connecting up an FO cable
For the FO cable, use the second opening from the left in the seal. Cable routing is
illustrated in the figure above. For individual cores immediately following the connector, the
minimum bending radius is 25 mm. Refer to the specification of the cable you are using for
the minimum permitted bending radius of the cable within the jacket. Make sure that the FO
cable is not sharply kinked after passing through the housing.
An adhesive sealing foil must be used in the housing sealing with FO cables (position A in
the figure above). For more detailed information, refer to the section "Connecting the
cables".
Grounding terminal
WARNING
To operate the SCALANCE W786 safely, the chassis ground connector must have a
suitable cable connected. Do not use the SCALANCE W786 without a ground cable
connected.
The chassis ground connector is located on the rear of the device (M4 thread). Connect the
ground cable before you mount the SCALANCE W786 on a wall or on the optional mounting
plate. Once the SCALANCE W786 is mounted, the connector is no longer accessible.
Place the supplied toothed washer directly on the rear of the device before screwing on the
ground cable. Only then can you be sure that there is ideal contact with the screwed-on
cable.
Figure 7-8 Chassis ground connector on the rear of the SCALANCE W786
Drilling template
The location of the holes for mounting the SCALANCE W786 on a wall is shown in the
following figure:
19
187
46
34 184 34
Figure 7-9 Drilling template for wall mounting of the SCALANCE W786
Procedure
SCALANCE W786-1x
L1 PoE P1 R1 F
-3
SCALANCE W786-2x
86
W7
AL
AN
CE L1 PoE P1 R1 R2 F
SC F
R3
R2
R1
P1
PoE
L1
SCALANCE W786-3x
L1 PoE P1 R1 R2 R3 F
Note
The "PoE" LED does not exist on devices with a port for FO cable.
Note
If the LED for the WLAN port is not green when the device starts up, although it is activated,
the port is not ready for operation (interface not initialized).
The main reason for this is usually that during commissioning of the SCALANCE W78x
products, a waiting time of up to 15 minutes can occur when the ambient temperature is
below zero. The device is ready for operation at the specified ambient temperature as soon
as the LED for the WLAN interface is lit green.
Connector variants
With a SCALANCE W786, you have the choice of two Ethernet ports:
● RJ-45 jack
● ST duplex socket for multimode FO cables 1310 nm and a maximum cable length of
3000 m
ST-Duplex:
TX RX
Figure 7-12 Position of the Ethernet port with the housing cover removed
Product versions
● SCALANCE W786-1PRO with one wireless interface and in the variants with two internal
antennas or two external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or FO connector
● SCALANCE W786-2PRO with two wireless interfaces and in the variants with four
internal antennas or four external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or FO connector
● SCALANCE W786-3PRO with three wireless interfaces and in the variants with six
external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or with FO connector
Data transfer
Interfaces
Electrical data
Construction
MTBF 61 years
(1) US variant
(2) There are two internal antennas per WLAN port. The antenna used is always the one that
provides the best possible data transmission (diversity).
CE conformity
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D conform to the regulations of the following
European directive:
● 99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Conformity with the basic requirement of the directive is attested by adherence to the
following standards:
● EN 60950
Safety of information technology equipment
● EN 301489-1
Electromagnetic compatibility for radio equipment and services
● EN 301489-17
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems and for equipment in
local high-performance wireless networks (HIPERLAN)
● EN 300328
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum issues
● EN 301893
Broadband radio access networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz high-performance RLAN
● EN 50371
Compliance of low power electronic and electrical apparatus with the basic restrictions
related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields (10 MHz to 300 GHz)
● 1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety regulations.
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Industrielle Kommunikation
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
This declaration certifies compliance with the directives named above, but does not
guarantee any specific properties.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
WARNING
When used under hazardous conditions (Zone 2), the SCALANCE W784-1xx or W74x-1
product must be installed in an enclosure. To comply with EN 50021, this enclosure must
meet the requirements of at least IP 54 in compliance with EN 60529.
DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE
ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
Device variants
The technical specifications apply to the following products:
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1RR
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1
Data transfer
Interfaces
Electrical data
Power consumption 5W
Construction
MTBF 67 years
90
PoE
R1
P1
L1
F
30
205
s
110
SCALANCE
5
15
20
100
20
Figure 7-13 Drilling template for wall mounting of a SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
Secure the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 to the wall using four screws. The screws are
not supplied with the device. The type and length of the screws depend on the type of wall.
Note
The minimum clearance between the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 and fluorescent
lamps should be 0.5 m.
WARNING
Danger due to lightning strikes
Antennas installed outdoors must be within the area covered by a lightning protection
system. Make sure that all conducting systems entering from outdoors can be protected by
a lightning protection potential equalization system.
When implementing your lightning protection concept, make sure you adhere to the VDE
0182 or IEC 62305 standard.
WARNING
Danger due to lightning strikes
Installing this lightning protector between an antenna and a SCALANCE W-700 is not
adequate protection against a lightning strike. The LP798-1N lightening protector only
works within the framework of a comprehensive lightning protection concept. If you have
questions, ask a qualified specialist company.
Note
The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge immunity tests on power supply lines, are met only
when a Blitzductor is used with 12 - 24 V DC and 48 V DC:
12 - 24 V DC: VT AD 24V type no. 918 402
48 V DC: Type no. 919 545 and 919 506 (holder)
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans Dehn Str. 1, Postfach 1640, D-92306
Neumarkt, Germany
WARNING
Danger to life from overvoltage, fire hazard
SCALANCE W-700 devices are designed for operation with a directly connectable safety
extra-low voltage or with the power supply adapters available as accessories (available
only for the SCALANCE W786-xPRO device). Therefore only safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) with limited power source (LPS) complying with IEC950/EN60950/VDE0805 may
be connected to the power supply terminals (exception: Power supply adapter for 100 - 240
V AC for the SCALANCE W786-xPRO).
Take measures to prevent transient voltage surges of more than 40% of the rated voltage.
This is the case if you only operate devices with SELV (safety extra-low voltage).
The power supply unit to supply the SCALANCE W-700 must comply with NEC Class 2
(requirements of class 2 for power supply units of the "National Electrical Code, table 11
(b)") or SELV with LPS (Limited Power Source) EN 60950-1. If the power supply is
designed redundantly (two separate power supplies), both power supplies must meet these
requirements.
Exceptions:
• Power supply with PELV (according to VDE 0100-410 or IEC 60364-4-41) is also
possible if the generated rated voltage does not exceed the voltage limits 25 V AC or 60
V DC.
Grounding
CAUTION
Damage to the device due to potential differences
To avoid the influence of electromagnetic interference, the device should be grounded.
There must be no potential difference between the following parts, otherwise the device or
other connected device could be severely damaged:
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the ground potential of the antenna.
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the ground potential of a device connected over
Ethernet.
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the shield contact of the connected Ethernet
cable.
Connect both grounds to the same foundation earth or use an equipotential bonding cable.
CAUTION
Damage to the Ethernet interface
Repeated fast removal and insertion of the Ethernet cable when using Power-over-Ethernet
and when there is a redundant power supply can cause damage to the Ethernet interface.
Avoid repeatedly removing and inserting the Ethernet cable when using Power-over-
Ethernet and a redundant power supply.
FM warning notice
When operated in potential hazardous areas:
WARNING - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR
DIVISION 2
WARNING - DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED
WARNING - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT
7.3.3.3 Connectors for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
24 V / 48 V
L1 M1 M2 L2
Figure 7-14 Connector for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1. The screw
terminal is located as shown on the rear of the connector.
Perform the following steps to connect a power supply cable to a SCALANCE W784-1xx /
W74x-1:
1. Connect the supplied connector to the power supply cable. The figure above shows the
location of the socket in the housing and the contact assignment. The connector is
protected against polarity reversal. When connecting the wires, make sure that the
connector is oriented correctly.
2. Press the connector into the socket in the housing until it engages.
3. Make sure that there is suitable strain relief for the power cable.
The Ethernet connector is located on the underside of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
(position A in the figure above)
Insert the Ethernet connector into this jack until it locks in place. Make sure that there is
suitable strain relief for the Ethernet cable.
B
R1
F
PoE
P1
L1
Figure 7-16 Connectors for external antennas on the top of a SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
The figure above shows the location of the antenna sockets "A" and "B". Perform the
following steps to connect a cable for an external antenna to a SCALANCE W784-1xx /
W74x-1:
1. Insert the connector on the antenna cable into the R-SMA socket and tighten the sleeve
nut on the socket (key size SW8). The maximum tightening torque is 0.6 Nm.
2. Screw a terminating resistor to the unused socket if you are only using one antenna.
Procedure
Figure 7-17 Side view of an S7-300 standard rail (shown in gray) with an adapter plate fitted
Note
For cabinet installation, we recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on
directly neighboring mounting rails
Follow the steps below to fit the adapter plate to an S7-300 standard rail:
1. Place the adapter plate on the upper edge of the S7-300 standard rail (position A in the
figure above).
2. At the bottom of the adapter plate, there are two holes with recesses. Use these holes to
screw the adapter plate to the S7-300 standard rail. The required screws (position B in
the figure above) are supplied with the adapter plate.
The threaded holes at the bottom of the adapter plate are not suitable for screwing the
plate to the S7-300 standard rail.
Procedure
Figure 7-18 Side view of a DIN rail (shown in gray) with an adapter plate fitted
Note
For cabinet installation, we recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on
directly neighboring mounting rails
Follow the steps below to fit the adapter plate to a DIN rail:
1. Place the adapter plate on the upper edge of the DIN rail (position A in the figure above).
2. Pull down the DIN rail sliding catch (position B in the figure above) and press the adapter
plate against the DIN rail until the sliding catch engages.
Procedure
R1
F
PoE
P1
L1
s
E
NC
A LA
SC
Screw the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 to the plate using the four M4 screws supplied
with the adapter plate. The maximum tightening torque for these screws is 0.7 Nm.
Certifications
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
Installation
Installation is analogous to the SCALANCE X-100 modules.
Parameter settings
To operate the SCALANCE S, you must download a configuration created with the Security
Configuration Tool. To set the parameters, use the software application "Security
Configuration Tool" that ships with the product.
A SCALANCE S configuration includes the IP parameters and the setting for firewall rules
and, if applicable, the setting for IPsec tunnels (S612 / S613) or router mode.
Before putting the device into operation, you can first create the entire configuration offline
and then download it. For the first configuration (device with factory settings), use the MAC
address printed on the device.
Depending on the application, you will download the configuration to one or more modules
during the commissioning phase.
Factory defaults
With the factory defaults (settings as supplied or after resetting to factory defaults), the
SCALANCE S behaves as follows after turning on the power supply:
● IP communication is not possible since the IP settings are missing; in particular, the
SCALANCE S does not yet have an IP address.
As soon as the SCALANCE S module is assigned a valid IP address during configuration,
the module can also be reached via a router (IP communication is then possible).
● The device has a fixed, default MAC address; the MAC address is printed on the device
and must be used during configuration.
● The firewall is preconfigured with the following basic firewall rules:
– Unsecured data traffic from internal port to external port and vice versa
(external ↔ internal) is not possible;
The unconfigured status can be recognized when the F LED is lit yellow.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Displays
The following LEDs exist on all SCALANCE S devices and in the same numbers:
● Fault indicator (red LED); Labeled: F):
Status Meaning
Lit red Module detects a fault. (Signaling contact is open).
The following faults are detected:
• Internal error/fault (for example: startup failed)
• Invalid C-PLUG (invalid formatting)
Lit green Module is in productive mode (signaling contact is closed).
Not lit Module has failed; no power supply (signaling contact is open).
Lit yellow Module in startup. (Signaling contact open).
If no IP address exists, the module remains in this status.
Flashes yellow and Module resets itself to factory settings. (Signaling contact open).
red alternately
● Power indicator (red-green double LED; labeling: L1, L2):
Status Meaning
Lit green Power supply L1 or L2 is connected.
Not lit Power supply L1 or L2 not connected or < 14 V (L+)
Lit red Power supply L1 or L2 failed during operation or < 14 V (L+)
● Port status displays (one green-yellow double LED per RJ-45 jack, labeling: P1 or P2 and
a yellow LED, labeling: TX
Status Meaning
Lit green TP link exists
Flashes / lit yellow Receiving data at RX
Not lit No TP link or no data being received
Status Meaning
Flashes / lit yellow Data being sent
Not lit No data being sent
Operator controls
SCALANCE S devices have a reset button. The reset button is located on the rear of the
housing below a cover secured with screws immediately beside the C-PLUG. The reset
button is therefore mechanically protected against being activated accidentally.
Two functions can be triggered with the reset button:
● Restart
If the reset button is pressed for shorter than 5 seconds, the module is restarted. The
loaded configuration is retained.
● Reset to factory settings
If the reset button is pressed for longer than 5 seconds, the error LED starts to flash
yellow-red. The module is restarted and reset to the status set in the factory. A loaded
configuration is deleted. Resetting takes up to 2 minutes. During the reset, the fault LED
continues to flash yellow-red. The power supply must not be interrupted during this
procedure.
On completion of the reset, the device starts up again automatically. The fault LED is
then lit yellow.
If a C-PLUG is plugged in when you reset to factory settings, the C-PLUG is erased!
After pressing the button, the C-PLUG compartment must be closed again with the screw
cover.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
See also
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings (Page 244)
Technical specifications
Product name
The OSM/ESM products below meet the regulations listed if the corresponding symbols are
shown on the type plate:
CE mark
SIMATIC NET OSMs/ESMs meet the requirements of the following EC directives:
● Directive 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● Directive 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage
Limits" (Low Voltage Equipment Directive)
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industrielle Kommunikation (A&D SC IC)
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg, Germany
Area of application
The products are designed for use in an industrial environment:
UL approval
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories UL 1950 / UL 60950 (Information Technology Equipment)
CSA approval
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standard Association CSA C22.2 No. 60950-00
FM Approval
FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
*) Temperature Class T4 or T4A, depending on model
WARNING
In hazardous areas, personal injury or damage to property may occur if you make or break
an electrical circuit while an OSM/ESM is in operation.
Do not connect or disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is
present.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
Housing, installation
The Industrial Ethernet OSMs and ESMs have a sheet steel casing with degree of protection
IP20. They are suitable for the following types of installation:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Installation in pairs in a 19" cubicle
● Wall mounting
The modules can be installed vertically, one beside the other with no spacing between.
Unobstructed convection of surrounding air is essential, in particular air must be able to
circulate freely through the ventilation openings of the OSM/ESM.
Preparations
1. Prior to installation, check whether the settings of the DIP switch are correct for your
application.
2. Remove the terminal block for the power supply and signaling contact from the OSM and
wire up the power supply and signal cables.
3. Only for OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs:
Where necessary, remove the terminal blocks for the digital inputs from the OSM/ESM
and wire up the input signals.
Wall mounting
To install an OSM/ESM on a wall, follow the steps below:
1. Fit the supplied mounting brackets on the sides.
2. Secure the device to the wall using the brackets.
3. Connect the device to protective earth with a low-resistance connection via one of the
brackets.
The following table shows how to mount the device on different types of walls:
Wall Mounting
Concrete wall Use the four wall plugs (6 mm diameter and 30
mm long). (drill hole 6 mm in diameter, 45 mm
deep). To secure the device, use 4.5 mm
diameter and 40 mm long screws.
Metal wall To secure the device, use 4 mm diameter screws
(min. 2 mm thick) at least 15 mm long.
Sandwich type plaster walll Use an anchoring plug with at least
(min. 15 mm thick) 4 mm diameter.
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the device.
Status Effect
Lit The OSM/ESM has detected an error. At the
same time, the signaling contact opens.
Not lit No problems detected by the OSM/ESM.
Status Effect
Lit The standby function is activated, the OSM/ESM
is in standby passive mode.
Not lit The standby function is disabled.
flashes The standby function is activated, OSM/ESM is in
the standby active mode; in other words, the
master OSM/ESM has failed and the standby
OSM/ESM takes over data traffic.
Status Effect
Lit The OSM/ESM is operating in the redundancy
manager mode. The ring is operating free of
errors in other words the redundancy manager
does not allow traffic through but monitors the
ring.
Note: One OSM must operate in the redundancy
manager mode (and one only) in each OSM/ESM
ring.
Not lit The OSM/ESM is not operating in redundancy
manager mode.
flashes The OSM/ESM is in redundancy manager mode
and has detected a break on the ring. The
OSM/ESM makes the connection between its two
ring ports so that a functional linear configuration
is reestablished.
Overview
The display mode of the "Power" LED can be switched over by briefly pressing the
"Select/Set" button on the front panel of the OSM/ESM. The valid display mode is indicated
by the display mode LEDs on the OSM/ESM.
Depending on the status of the display mode LEDs, the "Power" LED has the two following
display modes:
Overview
The port LEDs indicate the operating states of the individual ports of the OSM/ESM. On the
OSM/ESM variants with digital inputs, the state of the inputs is also indicated by the port
LEDs. To allow this, the OSMs/ESMs have an additional display mode. The display mode of
the port LEDs can be changed using the Select/Set button on the front panel of the
OSM/ESM allowing all operating states to be displayed. The current display mode is
signaled by the display mode LEDs.
Note
Please restart the device after changing DIP switch settings. The switch setting is
adopted only when the device starts up.
"Select/Set" button
The "Select/Set" button on the front panel of the OSM/ESM has the following functions
● Pressing the button briefly moves on the display of the port LEDs (display mode). The
current display mode is indicated by the display mode LEDs.
● If the display is in the port status (all display mode LEDs off) and if the button is pressed
for three seconds, the display mode LEDs begin to flash. If you then continue to press the
button for a further two seconds, the OSM/ESM is reset.
When it is reset, all the settings of the OSM/ESM are set to their defaults (as set in the
factory). This allows you to cancel settings made, for example, with Web-Based
Management (WBM) (see also OSM/ESM Network Management, User Manual).
● If the display is in the fault mask status and you press the button for two seconds, the
display LEDs start to flash. If you then press the button for a further two seconds, the
current status of the ports and the supply voltages are entered in the fault mask. This
means, if, for example, the ports 1, 5, 6 had a valid connection (in other words the port
status displays of these ports are lit green or yellow) and if power supply 1 was active at
the point when the values were entered in the fault mask, ports 1, 5, 6 and power supply
1 will then be monitored.
Note
If the "Select/Set" button is pressed while the device is starting up (takes approximately
20 seconds) after turning on the OSM/ESM, the OSM/ESM changes to the load firmware
status (all display mode LEDs flash simultaneously). This status is exited by pressing the
button again.
ITP ports
In the ITP variant of the OSM/ESM, the end devices are attached via D-sub female
connectors. The casings of the connectors are electrically connected to the housing of the
OSM. A screw locking mechanism holds the connectors firmly in place.
TP ports
With OSM TP62, OSM TP22, ESM TP40, and ESM TP80 modules, the end devices are
connected via RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment (Medium Dependent Interface
Crossover).
Fiber-optic ports
The FO ports have BFOC/2.5(ST) female connectors. They monitor the connected cable for
wire breaks complying with the IEEE 802.3 100 Base-FX standard. A break on the FO cable
is always signaled by the port status display of both connected OSMs (status LED of the port
goes off).
Note
The FO ports operate at the fixed transmission rate of 100 Mbps. An optical link, for
example, to OLM (10 Mbps) is not possible.
Standby-sync port
A 9-pin female connector is used to connect the ITP XP standard cable 9/9 for the redundant
standby coupling. The casing of the connector is electrically connected to the housing of the
OSM/ESM.
The OSM TP22 and ESM TP40 do not have a standby-sync port.
A screw locking mechanism holds the connectors firmly in place.
Serial port
OSM/ESM modules have an RS-232 interface. This is used for the following purposes:
● Firmware updates
● Management with the aid of the command interpreter (Command Line Interpreter, CLI)
including setting of the IP address information
WARNING
Industrial Ethernet OSMs/ESMs are designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage.
This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC950/EN60950/
VDE0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals and the signaling contact.
The power supply unit to supply the OSM/ESM must comply with NEC Class 2 (voltage
range 18 - 32 V, current requirement 1 A)
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra-low
voltage (SELV), 24 V DC).
Exceptions:
* Power supply with PELV (according to VDE 0100-410) is also possible if the generated
rated voltage does not exceed the voltage limits 25 V AC or 60 V DC.
* Power supply by a SELV power source (according to IEC 60950) or PELV power source
(according to VDE 0100-410) without limited power is also permitted if suitable fire
protection measures are taken by:
- Installation in a cubicle
- Installation in a suitable enclosure
- Installation in a suitably equipped, closed room.
Power supply
The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the
higher output voltage supplies the OSM/ESM alone.
Digital Inputs
In the case of the OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs, the states of these inputs are available in a
management information base (MIB) and can be read with an SNMP get request. Depending
on the configuration of the device, changes at these inputs can also trigger the sending of E-
mails, SNMP traps and/or entries in the log of the OSM/ESM. The use of these functions is
described in the OSM/ESM Network Management User Manual /1/.
The digital inputs are attached using six-pin plug-in terminal blocks with screw locking
mechanisms.
WARNING
The input voltage must not exceed +30 V DC or fall below -30 V DC.
Outer dimensions and installation clearances for the OSM ITP62, OSM ITP62-LD, ITP53
Outer dimensions and installation clearances for the ESM ITP80/TP80 (side view)
Accessories
SIMATIC NET ITP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET ITP XP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET FIBER OPTIC glass FOC
SIMATIC NET TP Cord
SIMATIC NET FC Outlet RJ-45
SIMATIC NET FC TP cables
You will find ordering data in the catalog IK PI.
WARNING
The Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage.
This means that only safety extralow voltages (SELV) complying with IEC 950/EN
60950/VDE 0805 may be connected to the power supply terminals
or the signaling contact.
For more detailed information on the OSM/ESM, refer to the "Industrial Ethernet
OSM/ESM" operating instructions.
Interfaces
Connecting end devices or network segments 6 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on OSM ITP62 and OSM
over twisted pair / Industrial Twisted Pair ITP62-LD
5 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on OSM ITP53
8 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on ESM ITP80
2 x RJ-45 jacks on OSM TP22
4 x RJ-45 jacks on ESM TP40
6 x RJ-45 jacks on OSM TP62
8 x RJ-45 jacks on ESM TP80
All electrical ports support 10/100 Mbps
autonegotiation.
OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs:
The electrical ports support autocrossover.
Standby-sync port for redundant coupling of rings 1 x 9-pin D-sub female connector
(not OSM TP22, ESM TP40)
Attachment of further OSMs and end devices via 2 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM ITP 62, OSM
FO ITP62-LD, OSM TP62 and OSM TP22
3 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM ITP 53
8 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM BC08
(100 Mbps, 100BaseFX, full duplex)
Connector for power supply and signaling contact 1 x 6-pin plug-in terminal block
Power supply 2 x 24 V DC power supplies (18 to 32 V DC)
(redundant inputs isolated) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power supply voltage connected over high
resistance with housing (not electrically isolated).
Tested to IEC 6100-4-5, 1995 "Surge Immunity
Test", performed with lightning protection device
DEHN Blitzductor VT AD 24V, article no. 918 402
Power loss at 24 V DC 20 W
Load on the signaling contact 24 V DC / max. 100 mA safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
Current consumption at rated voltage 1000 mA
Overvoltage protection at input Non-replaceable fuse (1.6 A / 250 V / time lag)
Digital Inputs Input voltage:
Rated value 24 V DC safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
For state "1": +13 ...+30 V
For "0" state: –30 ... +3 V
Max. input current: 8 mA
Max. cable length: 30 m
Inputs isolated from electronics.
FO cable length between two OSMs For OSM ITP62, OSM ITP53, OSM TP62, OSM
TP22:
0-3000 m (62.5/125 μm glass fiber; 1 dB/km at
1300 nm; 600 MHz*km; 6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
0-3000 m (50/125 μm glass fiber; 1 dB/km at
1300 nm; 600 MHz*km; 6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
For OSM ITP62-LD:
0-26000 m (10/125 μm single mode fiber; 0.5
dB/km at 1300 nm; 13 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin)
ITP cable length 0 - 100 m
TP cable length 0-10 m with TP cord
up to 100 m total length when using the
FastConnect cabling system
Length of the ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 at 0 - 40 m
standby-sync port
Cascading depth
Construction
Scope of supply
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
Fittings for 19" cubicle installation/wall mounting
6-pin plug-in terminal block for power supply and signaling contact
One to two 6-pin plug-in terminal blocks for OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs
Documentation on the CD
Order numbers
Accessories
Approvals
UL UL 1950
CSA CSA C22.2 No. 950
FM FM 3611
C-TICK AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
CE yes
Shipbuilding approval -
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
Housing, installation
The ELS has a robust sheet steel casing with degree of protection IP20. They are suitable
for the following types of installation:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Installation in a 19" cubicle (along with other ELS modules in the 19" mounting system)
● Wall mounting
Note
Remember that the ELS must only be installed horizontally (ventilation slits top/bottom
see Figure 4). To ensure adequate convection, there must be a clearance of at least 5 cm
above and below the ventilation slits. You should also make sure that the permitted
ambient temperature range is not exceeded.
Preparations
Remove the terminal block from the ELS and wire up the power supply lines
Wall mounting
To install an ELS on a wall, follow the steps below:
1. Fit the supplied mounting brackets on the sides of the ELS.
2. Secure the device to the wall using the brackets and fittings suitable for the wall in
question.
3. Using one of the brackets or the PE screw terminal, connect the device with protective
earth with as low a resistance as possible.
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the
device.
Grounding
● 19" cubicle: Please note that the ELS must be grounded with a low resistance via the two
holding brackets. It is also possible to ground the device using the PE screw terminal on
the terminal block.
● Installation on a DIN rail: The device is grounded either via the DIN rail or the PE screw
terminal on the terminal block.
● Wall mounting: Please note that the ELS must be grounded with a low resistance via the
two holding brackets. It is also possible to ground the device using the PE screw terminal
on the terminal block.
● S7 standard rail: The device is grounded either via the two mounting brackets or the PE
screw terminal on the terminal block.
LEDs
ELS modules have the following LED displays:
● Power display: The status of the ELS TP40M is indicated by a green and a red LED, on
the ELS TP40 and ELS TP80, a green LED is used.
● The status of each TP interface is indicated by a green/yellow LED:
Power supply
The connection of the power supply on all ELS is made using a 3-pin plug-in terminal block
with a screw locking mechanism. A suitable terminal block is supplied with all ELS devices.
The power supply is connected over a high resistance with the enclosure to allow an
ungrounded set up. The ELS TP80 can also be grounded via the PE screw terminal on the
terminal block.
No signaling contact
The ELS devices do not have a signaling contact.
Dimension drawings
62.3
Links / Left
130
144.5
Oben / Top
Vorne / Front
144.5
Figure 9-14
Oben / Top
6GK11026AB00_001
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
Format / Size: DIN A2 Massstab / Scale: 1:1
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
417
418
Vorne / Front
Links / Left
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
144.5
Figure 9-15
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
130
54
Oben / Top
6GK11027AA00_001
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
Format / Size: DIN A2 Massstab / Scale: 1:1
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
Interfaces
Depending on the variant, the following TP interfaces are available:
● Twistedpair port (RJ-45): TP cords or TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can
be connected to the RJ-45 TP port. In conjunction with IE FC outlet RJ-45, a total cable
length of up to 100 m is permitted.
● Twisted pair interface as insulation piercing contacts: IE FC TP cables with a maximum
length of up to 100 m can be connected to the TP interfaces with insulation piercing
contacts.
Further data
Order numbers
Star, linear bus, ring, tree Star, linear bus, ring, tree Wireless network
Network topology
Documentation
General
Note
For detailed information on laying electrical and optical bus cables, refer to the Appendix.
See also
Laying bus cables (Page 574)
Design
The cable consists of two pairs of wires each pair twisted together (PIMPF structure). Each
pair is shielded with an aluminum foil. The outer shield is a tinplated copper braid mesh. The
outer sheath is PVC.
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by a plastic laminated aluminum foil with an external contact
surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a braided shield of tinplated
copper wires (coverage approximately 88%).
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Plastic foil
Jacket (green)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foils)
Label
The IE TP CORD is labeled as follows:
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP CORD CAT5 (600MHz)".
Technical specifications
The available preassembled IE TP Cord 2x2 cables are listed in the section Preassembled
Twisted Pair Cord cables.
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair cords (Page 451)
Design
The cable consists of four pairs of wires. Each wire has a PE jacket. The pairs are twisted
together. Each pair is shielded with an aluminum foil. The outer shield is a tinplated copper
braid mesh. The material of the outer jacket is FRNC (flame-retardant, non-corrosive).
Figure 10-3 Structure of the Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet)
Label
The IE TP CORD is labeled as follows:
"meter markers" SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP Cord 4x2
CAT6 * AWM STYLE 21283 *
Technical specifications
The available preassembled IE TP Cord 4 x 2 cables are listed in the section "Preassembled
Industrial Twisted Pair and twisted pair cables".
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables (Page 451)
10.4.2.1 FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet
Design
The FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cable is a shielded cable with a symmetrical radial design
and 100 W characteristic impedance. The cable consists of 4 conductors arranged as a star
quad.
The IE FC Standard Cable and IE FC Food Cable have solid cores, the other cables (the
IE FC Trailing Cable, the IE FC Trailing Cable GP, the IE FC Flexible Cable GP, the
IE FC Marine Cable, the IE FC Torsion Cable and the IE FC FRNC Cable and IE FC
Festoon Cable) have stranded cores.
Cores
(star quad)
Jacket Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid) Plastic foil
Plastic laminated
aluminum foil
Inner jacket
Dummy core
Core
Outer jacket
Outer braided shield
Inner jacket
Plastic foil
Figure 10-4 Basic structure of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cable
Table 10-6 Electrical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Table 10-7 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Table 10-8 Electrical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Table 10-9 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Inner wire diameter (copper) 0.75 mm, AWG22 0.75 mm, AWG22 0.75 mm, AWG22
Core insulation PE Ø 1.5 mm PE Ø 1.5 mm PP Ø 1.5 mm
Inner jacket PVC Ø 3.9 mm FRNC Ø 3.9 mm FRNC Ø 3.9 mm
Jacket PVC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm PUR Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm FRNC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Transport/storage -25 ºC to +75 ºC -40 ºC to +75 ºC -25 ºC to +70 ºC
temperature -25 ºC to +75 ºC -50 ºC to +75 ºC -40 ºC to +70 ºC
Installation temperature -10 ºC to +60 ºC -20 ºC to +60 ºC 0 ºC to +50 ºC
Permitted bending radius
multiple 7.5 x ∅ 7.5 x ∅ 15 x ∅
single 5x∅ 3x∅ 6x∅
Bending cycles 3 million 3) 4 million 3) -
Permitted tensile force ≤ 150 N ≤ 150 N ≤ 150 N
Weight approx. approx. 68 kg/km approx. 63 kg/km approx. 68 kg/km
Free of halogens no yes yes
Resistance to fire Flame retardant to Flame retardant to Flame test to IEC 60332-
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4) IEC 60332-1 3-22; flame retardant to
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Resistance to oil Conditionally resistant Conditionally resistant Conditionally resistant
UL listing / 300 V rating yes/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res yes/CMX yes/CM/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res
UL style / 600 V rating yes no no
CCC certificate 5) Not necessary Not necessary Not necessary
UV resistance yes yes yes
Fast Connect cable structure yes yes yes
Silicone-free yes yes yes
Application
● IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2:
Standard bus cable with rigid cores and specially designed for fast assembly. Four rigid
conductors are arranged as a star quad.
● IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2:
Flexible bus cable for special applications with occasional movement; four wires
(stranded) arranged as a star quad.
● IE FC Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement, for example for
use in robots; stranded cores.
● IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement in a in a drag
chain, for example for permanently moving machine parts; not halogen-free; four wires
(stranded) arranged as start quad.
● FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement in a in a drag
chain, for example for permanently moving machine parts; halogen-free; four wires
(stranded) arranged as start quad.
● IE FC Marine Cable 2 x 2:
Bus cable specially for use on ships; halogen-free, certified for shipbuilding; four wires
(stranded) arranged as star quad.
Advantages
For structured cabling in the factory
● Time-saving due to simple and fast installation with FastConnect cables to the Industrial
Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 and IE FC RJ-45 Plug with insulation piercing technique.
● Convenient stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool, with which the outer jacket and
braid shield can be removed to the perfect length in one step.
● Versatile application due to special bus cables
● High noise immunity due to double shielding
● Easy length measurement with printed meter markers
● Exceeds the requirements of category 5 (CAT5e) of the international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
● Silicone-free and therefore suitable for use in the automobile industry (for example in
paint shops)
Notes on Installation
The bus cables are sold in meters.
FastConnect
Using the IE FastConnect stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield of IE FastConnect cables
can be stripped to correct lengths in a single action. This allows the Outlet RJ-45 and the IE
FC R-45 Plug to be connected quickly and simply to the Industrial Ethernet FC cable.
Reduced length
Due to the stranded cores used in the cable variants, the signal attenuation is higher. For
precise values, refer to the above tables in the electrical data. Make sure that you take this
into account in your configuration.
Do not assemble with D-sub connectors
FastConnect twisted-pair cables are not suitable for the use of Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub
connectors due to their diameter. If you assemble Industrial Twisted Pair cables yourself with
D-sub connectors, use only Industrial Twisted Pair cable!
Laying cables
During storage, transport, and installation, the bus cables must be closed at both ends with a
shrink-on cover. Make sure that you do not exceed the bend radii and tensile stress!
Order number
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 6XV1 840-2AH10
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet
RJ-45 for general application, 4-wire, shielded, sold in meters,
maximum length available 1000 m, minimum length available 20 m.
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B) 6XV1 870-2B
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for occasional movement;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 870-2D
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for drag chains;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 840-3AH10
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180/90 for drag chains;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
Order number
IE TP Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 870-2F
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for use with robots;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC TP FRNC Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B) 6XV1 871-2F
TP installation cable for connection to FC OUTLET RJ-45, 4-wire,
shielded, CAT 5, sold in meters, maximum length available 1000 m,
minimum length available 20 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B) 6XV1 840-4AH10
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180/90 shipbuilding certified;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC Stripping Tool 6GK1 901-1GA00
Preset insulation stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet
FC cables
IE FC blade cassettes (12 mm) 6GK1 901-1GB00
Cassette with spare blades for the Industrial Ethernet Stripping Tool;
for use with IE FC Outlet RJ-45, ELS TP40, set of 5
IE FC blade cassettes (5 mm) 6GK1 901-1GB01
Cassette with spare blades for the Industrial Ethernet Stripping Tool;
for use with IE FC RJ-45 Plugs and IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet, set of
5
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0
For connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP Cords;
graduated price as of 10 and 50 connectors
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for
network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 90
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for
ET 200S
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0
1 pack of 50
Order number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for
SIMOTION and SINAMICS
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0
1 pack of 50
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
Electronic manuals for communication systems, protocols, products;
on CD-ROM;
German/English
Cable structure
&RSSHUZLUH$:*
,QQHUMDFNHWKDORJHQIUHH
&RUHLQVXODWLRQ
7ZLVWHGSDLUV
)RLODQGEUDLGHGVKLHOG
&HQWUDOHOHPHQW
2XWHU39&MDFNHW
Design
The FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cable IE FC Cable 4x2 has a particularly robust
design for industrial applications. Its shielded, symmetrical, radial structure allows the use of
the IE FC stripping tool.
Table 10-11 Electrical data of the 8-wire FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cable:
Table 10-12 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Application
The IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2 is an 8-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection
to IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet for universal application. It is a standard bus cable with rigid
cores and is specially designed for fast assembly with corresponding UL approval (general
purpose) for installation in cable bundles and on cable racks according to the regulations of
the NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.
Notes on Installation
The bus cables are sold in meters and have meter markers printed on them.
Using the IE FC stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield of IE FC 4x2 cables can be
stripped to correct lengths in a single action. This allows the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet to
be connected quickly and simply to the IE FC 4x2 cable.
Note: The user may need to readjust the IE FC stripping tool 6GK1 901-1GA00 for the 4x2
cable variant. The two setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be
opened by approximately half a turn. An IE FC stripping tool preset for 4x2 cables is in
preparation.
Laying cables
During storage, transport, and installation, the bus cable must be closed at both ends with a
shrink-on cover. Make sure that the bend radii and tensile stress are not exceeded!
Label
The IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2 has the following printed on it every meter:
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET FC TP STANDARD CABLE GP 4x2
CAT6 6XV1870-2E AWG22 SUN RES OIL RES (UL) CMG FT4 E137929 + "lot" + "meter
marker"
Order number
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2 6XV1 870-2E
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45
Modular Outlet for general application, 8-wire, shielded, sold in
meters, maximum length available 1000 m, minimum length available
20 m
IE FC Stripping Tool 6GK1 901-1GA00
Insulation stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC
cables
Application
With its flexible cores (stranded wires), this halogen-free cable is suitable for applications
with occasional movement. The cable has the FastConnect cable structure and can
therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping tool and can be assembled with all
FastConnect IE connectors.
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472
Order number
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2 6XV1 871-2F
Application
With its PE outer jacket and stranded wires, the IE FC TP food cable is especially suitable
for applications in the food, beverages and tobacco sector. The cable has the FastConnect
cable structure and can therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping tool and can be
assembled with all FastConnect IE connectors.
Due to its mechanical design (stranded wires and PUR outer jacket), the IE FC Festoon
Cable GP 2x2 is especially suitable for festoon applications on cranes. The cable has the
FastConnect cable structure and can therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping
tool and can be assembled with all FastConnect IE connectors.
Table 10-17 Electrical data of the IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2 and IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2:
Table 10-18 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 0472 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472
Order number
IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2 6XV1 871-2L
IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2 6XV1 871-2S
Cable structure
Design
The cables for data transmission have a shielded, symmetrical, radial design. Four cables for
power transmission are arranged around them. The entire cable is surrounded by a 1 mm
thick green FRNC jacket.
Due to the different structure compared with FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cables,
the IE FC stripping tool cannot be used.
Notes on Installation
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 is available in meters.
Due to its design, it is not possible to use the IE FC stripping tool.
To keep the voltage drop over the power supply cable as low as possible, the two cables
with the same color should be connected in parallel. Please note that the power supply
voltage at the input to the cable must be higher than the minimum permitted power supply of
the device being supplied by the amount of power drop over the outward and return
conductor. On the other hand, the power supply voltage must not exceed the maximum
permitted power supply of the device being supplied when no current is flowing.
The specified current of 0.35 A per wire of the power supply cable means a maximum
current of 0.7 A when two wires are connected in parallel for the outward and return cables.
Note that in this case, with an 80 m long IE Hybrid Cable, the voltage input must be >= 24 V
to supply the consumer with a voltage of at least 20.4 V.
If the maximum permitted current over the power supply cables is exceeded permanently,
the data transmission characteristics of the data lines can no longer be guaranteed. Their
attenuation characteristics deteriorate with increasing temperature. For this reason, if 0.35 A
is applied to each wire, the lower maximum ambient temperature of +65 °c applies.
Label
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 has the following printed on it:
"continuous length in meters" SIEMENS SIMATIC NET IE Hybridcable 2x2 +
4x0.34 6XV1870-2J CAT V * 22AWG (SHIELDED) (UL) E119100 CMG 75°C or PLTC or
AWM 21287 600V FT4 SUN RES
Order number
Order number
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 6XV1 870-2J
Flexible cable; 4 x Cu CAT 5e, shielded (AWG 22) and 4 x CU (0.34
mm2 per core) for IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert and
Hybrid cable connector IP67; available in meters; maximum length
available 1000 m.
Pair 1 2
Conductor a white White
Conductor b blue Orange
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by two plastic laminated aluminum foils with an external
contact surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a braided shield of tin-
plated copper wires (coverage approximately 90%).
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
Meter marker aluminum foils)
(consecutive number)
Plastic foil
Dummy elements
(wire pair 2)
Jacket (green)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foils)
Figure 10-7 Structure of the 2 x 2-wire Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable
Label
The standard cable has the following printed on it
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP 6XV1850-0AH10 (meter marker)".
There are markers printed at one meter intervals. These make it simple to check the length
of the cable.
Label
The FRNC cable has the following printed on it
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP FRNC CABLE
CAT5 6XV1851-0AH10* 22AWG (SHIELDED) (UL) E119100 CMG 75°C or
PLTC FT4 SUN RES (meter marker)".
Table 10-23 Electrical data of the ITP Standard Cable and ITP FRNC Cable at 20 °C
Table 10-24 Mechanical data of the ITP Standard Cable and ITP FRNC Cable
ITP Standard Cable for ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Standard code J-02YSCY 2x2x0.64/1.5 PIMF F GN J-02YSCY 2x2x0.64/1.5 PIMF F GN
FRNC
Core diameter to AWG 22 0.64 mm 0.64 mm
Outer diameter approx. (6.0 x 9.4) mm approx. (6.0 x 9.4) mm
Thickness of the jacket approx. approx. 0.8 mm approx. 0.8 mm
Permitted bending radius: over the flat side over the flat side
under tensile strain during installation approx. 48 mm approx. 48 mm
after installation without tensile strain approx. 33 mm approx. 33 mm
Permitted tensile force ≤ 80 N ≤ 80 N
Temperature range:
Operation -40 °C to +80 °C -40 °C to +80 °C
Installation/assembly -25 °C to +80 °C -25 °C to +80 °C
Transport/storage -40 °C to +80 °C -40 °C to +80 °C
Copper number 46 kg/km 46 kg/km
Net weight 90 kg/km 98 kg/km
Free of halogens no yes
Resistance to fire Flame retardant to VDE 0482-265-2-1 Flame retardant to VDE 0482-266-2-4
IEC 60332-1 IEC 60332-3-24)
Resistance to oil Conditionally resistant to mineral oils Conditionally resistant to mineral oils
and fats and fats
Silicone-free yes yes
Cannot be connected to IE FC Outlet RJ-45, IE FC RJ-45 Plug and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
The two ITP cables are not suitable for connection to the IE FC Outlet RJ-45, IE FC RJ-
45 Plug and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet due to their diameters. Use the FastConnect (FC)
twisted pair cables for this.
Versions available
The two ITP cables are available either by the meter without connectors or with 9 and 15-pin
D-sub connectors.
At the network component end, metal 9-pin D-sub male connectors are used, at the device
end 15-pin connectors. The 15-pin connectors have a special jumper with which the modules
with integrated twisted-pair transceiver can switch from AUI to twisted pair mode.
The following preassembled cables use the Industrial Twisted Pair cables:
● ITP Standard Cable 9/15
● ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
● ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15
● ITP FRNC Cable 9/15
The XP supplement means that this is a crossover cable.
10.4.5 Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables
Overview
The following twisted-pair cables are available:
Connector pinout
5 blue 3
TD+ TD+
white
TD- 9 6 TD-
orange
RD+ 1 1 RD+
RD- 6 white 2 RD-
1 blue 1 RD+
RD+
white 6
RD- 6 RD-
orange
TD+ 5 5 TD+
9 white 9 TD-
TD-
9-pin 9-pin
D-sub male connector D-sub male connector
g) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 9/9
15-pin
D-sub male connector
i) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 15/RJ-45
(QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW (QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
8VHZLWK 8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV 0ELWV0ELWV
+RXVLQJVKLHOG DV
DV DV DV
(QGGHYLFH (QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW (QGGHYLFHHQGGHYLFH
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQWQHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
8VHZLWK 8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV +RXVLQJVKLHOG 0ELWV0ELWV
DV DV DV DV
ZKLWHEURZQ
75'3 5' 75'3
EURZQ
75'1 5' 75'1
75'3 EOXH 75'3
7'
75'1 ZKLWHEOXH 75'1
7'
Figure 10-11 Connector pin assignment of the IE TP Cord RJ-45_RJ-45 cables with 4 x 2 wires
1) For network devices and end devices that have the autocrossing function, no crossover
cable is necessary even when linking end device to end device or network component to
network component.
With devices that do not have the autocrossing function, a crossover cable is required to link
end device to end device or network component to network component.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 423)
Product range
Mounting bracket
The D-sub female connector has a mounting bracket. This allows the female connector to be
fixed in place. The mounting bracket has two functions:
● Strain relief
The TP cord and the RJ45 port on the end device are protected from tensile strain.
● Grounding
The mounting bracket is electrically connected with the casing of the female connector
and therefore also with the cable shields. The bracket should be screwed to a grounded
plate or rail ensuring good contact.
Connector pinout
(QGGHYLFH ,73FDEOHIRUQHWZRUNFRPSRQHQWV
5-SOXJ
SLQ'VXEIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
Figure 10-12 Connector pin assignment of the interface converter TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45
Overview
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
Overview
Connector pinout
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW (QGGHYLFH
EOXH
5' 7'
ZKLWH
5' 7'
RUDQJH
7' 5'
ZKLWH
7' 5'
&RGLQJIRU
6ZLWFKRYHU
$8,,73LQWHUIDFH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
D&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,736WDQGDUG&DEOH
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW 1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
)XQFWLRQ +RXVLQJVKLHOG )XQFWLRQ
3LQ 3LQ
EOXH
5' 5'
ZKLWH
5' 5'
RUDQJH
7' 7'
7' ZKLWH 7'
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
E&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,73;36WDQGDUG&DEOH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
F&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,73;36WDQGDUG&DEOH
See also
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 445)
Special lengths
Note
Special lengths for TP and ITP cables on request!
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 422)
RJ-45 plug
The RJ-45 plug is an 8-pin plug designed in compliance with IEC 60603-7. This plug type is
recommended according to IEEE 802.3 for 10BASE–T and 100BASE–TX. The RJ-45 plug
was developed by Western Electric and is also known as the Western plug.
The RJ45 plug cannot be ordered separately and is supplied only with preassembled cables
(TP cord).
● Connector casing with straight cable outlet
8
1
8
1
IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Due to their compact design, the cable connectors (FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 180) can be
used both for devices with individual jacks and for devices with multiple jacks (blocks). The
cable connector is particularly suitable for connecting FC TP cables to SIMATIC NET
modules and SCALANCE devices.
● With 90° (angled) cable outlet
The FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 90 is intended, for example, for connection of FC TP cables to
ET200 or PN/PN couplers.
The FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 145 can be used to connect FC TP cables to SIMOTION and
SINAMICS modules.
Installation
With the four integrated insulation piercing contacts, establishing contact with the FC cable
variants is simple and error-proof. With the casing open, colored markers on the contact
cover make it simple to connect the cores to the insulation piercing contacts. The transparent
synthetic material of the contact cover allows the user to check the contacts at any time.
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times. Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used
twice but must be cut off before fitting a new connector.
Technical specifications
Order number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for
network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack of 1 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
1 pack of 10 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
1 pack of 50 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 90
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for
ET 200S
1 pack of 1 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
1 pack of 10 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
1 pack of 50 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for
SIMOTION and SINAMICS
1 pack of 1 6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0
1 pack of 10 6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0
1 pack of 50 6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0
See also
Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 530)
Installation
The assembly of the IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug is described in a separate section (Page 533).
See also
Connecting the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 (Page 533)
IP65 plug
Table 10-35 Pin assignment of the cable socket Power M12 Cable Connector PRO
Pin 1 24 V DC
Pin 2 -
Pin 3 Ground
Pin 4 -
Table 10-36 Pin assignment of the cable socket Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO
Pin 1 F1
Pin 2 -
Pin 3 -
Pin 4 F2
Pin 5 -
The IE M12 Plug PRO is male and D-coded so that it cannot be confused with the Power
M12 Cable Connector PRO.
Order number
IE M12 Plug PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, D-coded, for assembly on IE FC Cable
2 x 2 with robust metal casing and fast connect technology; 180
degree cable outlet
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8
1 pack of 8
Signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO
M12 cable connector 5-pin, B-coded, for connection to power cable 6GK1 908-0DC10-6AA3
2x0.75
Power M12 cable connector PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, A-coded, connection to power cable 6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3
2x0.75
Power cable 2x0.75
Sold in meters 6XV1812-8A
See also
IP degrees of protection (Page 579)
Connector pinout
An IE M12 Plug PRO with the pinning as shown in the following table must be connected to
both ends of the IE FC cable.
Order number
IE M12 Plug PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, D-coded, for assembly on IE FC Cable
2 x 2 with robust metal casing and fast connect technology; 180
degree cable outlet
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8
1 pack of 8
IE FC Modular Outlet
General
Simple assembly with integrated insulation piercing contacts with color coding allows time-
saving and error-free installation of the 8-wire CAT6 Industrial Ethernet FC installation cable
in the CAT6 Industrial Ethernet Modular Outlet. The design of the 8-wire AWG22 cable
allows the outer jacket and shield to be stripped with the familiar IE FC Stripping Tool in one
action (it may be necessary for the user to readjust the tool for the 4x2 cable variant. The two
setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be opened by approximately
half a turn.) After preparing the cable in this way, contact is made immediately via the
insulation piercing contacts in the Modular Outlet.
Design
The robust metal housing is intended for industry (IP40) and allows the modular outlet to be
installed on a DIN rail. Direct mounting on a wall is also possible.
The metal housing also provides strain relief for the installation cables suitable for industrial
surroundings and reliable shield contact. With its higher IP40 degree of protection is can be
mounted directly on site.
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet basic module can be equipped with two different optional
inserts without changing the wiring (permanent wiring):
● Insert 2 FE: Two Fast Ethernet connections for attachment of two 10/100 Mbps end
devices/network components
● Insert 1 GE: One gigabit Ethernet connection for attaching a 10/100/1000 Mbps end
device/network component
The basic module can be ordered without inserts. In this case, the inserts must be ordered
separately.
The modular outlet
● FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 1 GE and
● FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 2 FE
The ordering unit is a basic module and the relevant insert. When necessary, the insert can
be replaced.
Replacing the insert allows an upgrade of a 100 Mbps double connection to a gigabit
connection. This is possible only if the wiring was performed with the IE FC standard cable 4
x 2 GP. In this case, there is no need to change the installed wiring.
SCALANCE X-400
S7-300
IE TP Cord
ET 200S
IE FC RJ45 IE FC RJ45 IE FC RJ45
Modular Modular Modular
Outlet Outlet Outlet
Insert 1GE Insert 2FE Insert 2FE
2 x 100 Mbit/s
connection PC
IE TP Cord
G_IK10_XX_10086
Modular Outlet
Insert 1GE
Figure 10-17 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE
provides not only a Fast Ethernet connection to connect a 10/100 Mbps end device / network
component but also the option of supplying power to the end device by connecting a power
supply to a two-wire terminal block. In this case, the wiring of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet must be performed with the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34. Apart from the 2x2 data
line, this cable has four wires intended for the power supply.
SCALANCE X-400
24 V DC
IE FC RJ45
Modular Outlet
Power Insert
IE Hybrid
cable connector
SCALANCE
G_IK10_XX_10087
W788-1PRO
Figure 10-19 Example of wiring with the FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert
Installation
You will find instructions on assembling the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet in the relevant
section of this manual.
To use the 2FE and 1 GE inserts, the basic modules of the outlets must be connected with
the following cable:
● IE FC Standard Cable 4 x 2 GP
The basic module of the FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert must be connected with the
following cable:
● IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Please note that the IE hybrid cable cannot be be prepared with the stripping tool.
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times. Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used
twice but must be cut off before fitting a new connector.
WARNING
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
• Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
• In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
• In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
• Current load maximum 0.5 A.
IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with interface to the slot of an insert Order number
Base module without insert 6GK1901-1BE00-0AA0
- with insert 2FE; insert for 2 x 100 Mbps interface 6GK1901-1BE00-0AA1
- with insert 1GE; insert for 1 x 1000 Mbps interface 6GK1901-1BE00-0AA2
- with power insert; insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbps interface 6GK1901-1BE00-0AA3
Insert 2FE for FC Modular Outlet Base; 2 x RJ-45 for 2 x 100 Mbps; 1 x 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
set of 4
Insert 1GE for FC Modular Outlet Base; 1 x RJ-45 for 1 x 1000 Mbps; 1 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
x set of 4
See also
Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45 (Page 532)
Installation
The FC Outlet RJ-45 is suitable for mounting on a DIN rail and for wall mounting. There are
four drilled holes for wall mounting.
By arranging several FC Outlet RJ-45 devices in a line, you can create a patch panel with
any terminal density you require (for example 16 outlets to a width of 19" is possible with a
suitably wide rail). The FC Outlet RJ-45 can also be installed behind a metal panel with a
suitable cutout (for example in a wiring cubicle).
Application example
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 is attached directly to the Industrial Ethernet FC TP
cable. To connect the FC Outlet RJ-45 and network components or an end device, various
preassembled RJ-45 patch cables are available.
Technical specifications
Interfaces
• Attachment of end devices, network components RJ-45 jack
• Attachment of Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables 4 insulation piercing terminals
Installation Standard rail or wall installation
Perm. ambient conditions
• Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
• Storage/transport temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
Construction
• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 31.7 x 107 x 30
• Weight 300 g
Degree of protection IP20
Transmission characteristics Correspond to category 5 of the
international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
Ordering data
Dimension drawings
Front
See also
Connecting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP / IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2 GP
(Page 535)
Left
General
The Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors correspond to the standards MIL-C-24308 and
DIN 41652. Due to its mechanical strength and its excellent electromagnetic compatibility, for
use in a harsh industrial environment, this connector was preferred to the RJ-45 connector
recommended for 10BASE-T in IEEE 802.3.
Both connector types have a metal casing. The Industrial Twisted Pair cables are connected
to the connector pins using screw terminals, special tools are not required.
For a detailed description of fitting connectors, refer to the section D-sub connectors.
Screw terminal
Connector insert
5 9 1 6 Cover of the
Knurled screw housing
Connector
housing
Cable clamp
Figure 10-23 Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (9-pin) for user assembly
Sealing plugs
Cable clamp
Figure 10-24 Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (15-pin) for user assembly
See also
Fitting the D-sub male connector (Page 549)
Technical specifications
The following tables show an overview of the technical specifications of all SIMATIC NET
glass FO cables.
Table 10-46 Technical specifications of the FO Standard Cable GP and FO Ground Cable
Table 10-47 Technical specifications for the FO Trailing Cable and FO Trailing Cable GP
Table 10-48 Technical specifications for the INDOOR fiber optic cable and fiber optic standard cable
Table 10-49 Technical specifications for the Flexible Fiber-optic trailing cable and SIENOPYR Duplex
Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
The fiberoptic standard cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 6XV1 873–2A (UL) E157125 OFN (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm. The slash can be used
as a meter marker. Meter markers make it easier to estimate the length of an installed cable.
Properties
The fiberoptic standard cable has the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
● Suitable for direct connector assembly
● Available in meters up to max. 3000 m
● Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 300 m
● Preassembled with 4 SC connectors in lengths up to 300 m
Note
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
Application
The fiberoptic standard cable is the universal cable for use indoors and outdoors. It is
suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850 nm
and 1300 nm.
See also
Preassembled FO standard cable GP (Page 508)
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
%LQGLQJHOHPHQW
5RGHQWSURWHFWLRQ
3(RXWHUMDFNHW
The FO Ground Cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO Ground Cable 50/125 6XV1873–
2G (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100
cm. The slash can be used as a meter marker. Meter markers make it easier to estimate the
length of an installed cable.
See also
Preassembled FO Ground Cable (Page 508)
10.5.1.4 FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL)
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
%LQGLQJHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
385RXWHUMDFNHW
The FO Trailing Cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is made of PUR and is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO
Trailing Cable 50/125 6XV1873–2C (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter
marker)" approximately every 100 cm. The slash can be used as a meter marker. Meter
markers make it easier to estimate the length of an installed cable. This cable does not have
UL approval.
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
'XPP\HOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&RXWHUMDFNHW
In contrast to the FO Trailing Cable, the material of the outer jacket is PVC. The fiber type is,
however, the same. The FO Trailing Cable GP has UL and CSA approval.
The outer jacket is made of PVC and is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO
Trailing Cable GP 50/125 6XV1873–2D (UL)E157125 OFN LL 64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA
(drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
Properties
The FO Trailing Cable and FO Trailing Cable GP have the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
● Suitable for direct connector assembly
● Available in meters up to 3000 m
● Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 100 m
● Preassembled with 4 SC connectors in lengths up to 100 m
The FO Trailing Cable also has the following properties:
● Number of bending cycles at least 5,000,000
The FO Trailing Cable GP has the following properties compared with the FO Trailing Cable:
● UL and CSA approval
● Number of bending cycles at least 3,500,000
Application
The FO Trailing Cable is suitable for use in trailing cables for heavy mechanical stress, the
FO Trailing Cable GP for less mechanical stress.
Both cables are suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range
around 850 nm and 1300 nm.
See also
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable (Page 509)
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable GP (Page 510)
Application
The FO FRNC Cable with two 50/125 µm fibers is halogen-free and flame retardant and is
particularly suitable for fixed installation in buildings. With this cable design, little smoke that
is free of halogens is produced in the case of fire therefore reducing secondary damage
significantly.
Technical specifications
Ordering data
Technical specifications
The following tables show an overview of the technical specifications of the SIMATIC NET
glass FO cables 62.5/125 µm.
Table 10-50 Technical specifications for the INDOOR fiber optic cable and fiber optic standard cable
Table 10-51 Technical specifications of the flexible fiber optic trailing cable
Copper cable
Insulation
FO cable fiber
Tensile strain relief
Protective sleeve
Winding
Copper braid
Common sheath
Outer jacket
Properties
The SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable has the following properties:
● Ozone proof complying with DIN VDE 0472 Part 805 test type B
● Silicone-free
● Behavior in fire complying with IEC 603323 cat. A
● Corrosivity of combustion gases complying with IEC 607542
● Smoke density complying with IEC 61031
● Halogen-free
● Is approved for ship building
– Lloyds Register of Shipping
– Germanischer Lloyd
– Registro Staliano Navale
– Bureau Veritas
Application
The SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable is intended for fixed installation on ships and
offshore facilities in all enclosed spaces and on open decks. The cable is not, however,
intended for permanent installation in water.
It is suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850
nm and 1300 nm.
Technical specifications
Table 10-52 Technical specifications of the SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable
Brief description of the POF Standard Cable and POF Trailing Cable
outer sheath
strain relief using
aramide yarn
able
ndard C
POF Sta
G_IK10_XX_10179
The POF Standard Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 980/1000 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000
Profinet 6XV1874–2A E157125 OFN-FT1 c(UL)us OFN (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
The POF Standard Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Application
SIMATIC NET POF fiber-optic cables are used to set up optical PROFINET and Industrial
Ethernet networks indoors. Devices with an integrated optical interface (SC RJ connectors)
include, for example SCALANCE X200-4P IRT, SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE
X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X101-1POF, ET 200S.
Rugged round cables with green outer jacket and Kevlar strengthening elements and two
plastic fibers with a robust polyamide inner jacket for applications indoors and outdoors with
cable lengths up to 50 m. The cables are suitable for connector assembly on site.
● POF Standard Cable GP (General Purpose);
for indoor and outdoor applications
● POF Trailing Cable;
for use in drag chains
Table 10-53 Technical specifications of the POF Standard Cable GP and POF Trailing Cable
outer sheath
support element
fleece wrapping
with strain relief
strain relief elements
G_IK10_XX_10031
using aramide
PCF fiber yarn
hollow core
The PCF Standard Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Standard Cable GP 200/230
Profinet 6XV1861–2A (UL)E157125 OFN LL64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA (drum number) /
(year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
The PCF Standard Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Application
The PCF standard cable is a rugged round cable with a green PVC outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust polyamide inner jacket. It is
intended for fixed installation indoors with cable lengths up to 100 m. The recommended
wavelength is 660 m.
Cable type
Area of application FO cable for fixed installation indoors
Can be ordered In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code) I-VY(ZN)YY 2K200/230
Fiber type Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm 10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm 17 MHz * km
Number of fibers 2
Max. cable length 100 m
Materials
Fiber core Fused silica
Single jacket PVC
Tensile strain relief Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable PVC / green
Diameter of single element 2.2 mm
Outer diameter 7.2 mm
Cable weight approx. 45 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief 800 N
permanent 100 N
Bending radius, min.
brief 70 mm
permanent 105 mm
Max. transverse compression
brief 500 N/cm
permanent 300 N/cm
Installation and assembly -5 ºC to +50 ºC
temperature
Operating temperature -25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature -25 ºC to +75 ºC
UL approval Type OFN (NEC Article 770, UL 1651)
CSA approval Type OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA-Standard C22.2 No232-
M1988)
Shipbuilding approval No
Cable type
Chemical properties Conditionally resistant to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN EN ISO 4892-2,
procedure A; UV application 500 hours
The PCF Trailing Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Trailing Cable 200/230 6XV1861–
2C (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100
cm.
The PCF Trailing Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Application
The PCF trailing cable is a rugged round cable with a green PUR outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust PVC inner jacket. It is intended for
moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100
m. The recommended wavelength is 660 m.
Cable type
Area of application FO cable for flexible application in drag chains both indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code) AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230
Fiber type Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm 10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm 17 MHz * km
Number of fibers 2
Max. cable length 100 m
Cable type
Materials
Fiber core Fused silica
Single jacket PVC
Tensile strain relief Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable Polyurethane (PUR) / green
Diameter of single element 2.2 mm
Outer diameter 8.8 mm
Cable weight approx. 85 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief 2000 N
permanent 800 N
Bending radius, min.
brief 130 mm
permanent 175 mm
Max. transverse compression
brief 500 N/cm
permanent 300 N/cm
Bending cycles 5.000.000
Installation and assembly -5 ºC to +50 ºC
temperature
Operating temperature -25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature -30 ºC to +75 ºC
Resistance to fire Flame retardant
Shipbuilding approval No
Chemical properties High resistance to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN 53 387, procedure 1;
condition A
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
)OHHFHZUDSSLQJ
2SWLFDOILEHU
'XPP\HOHPHQW
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
)OHHFHZUDSSLQJ
39&RXWHUMDFNHW
The PCF Trailing Cable GP contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230
6XV1861–2D (UL)E157125 OFN LL64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
The PCF Trailing Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
The main difference between PCF Trailing Cable and PCF Trailing Cable GP is that the GP
variant as UL approval and that its outer jacket consists of PVC instead of PUR.
Application
The PCF trailing cable GP is a rugged round cable with a green PVC outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust PVC inner jacket. It is intended for
moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100
m. The recommended wavelength is 660 m.
Cable type
Area of application FO cable for flexible application in drag chains both indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code) AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2K200/230
Fiber type Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm 10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm 17 MHz * km
Cable type
Number of fibers 2
Max. cable length 100 m
Materials
Fiber core Fused silica
Single jacket PVC
Tensile strain relief Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable PVC / green
Diameter of single element 2.2 mm
Outer diameter 8.8 mm
Cable weight approx. 85 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief 2000 N
permanent 800 N
Bending radius, min.
brief 130 mm
permanent 175 mm
Max. transverse compression
brief 500 N/cm
permanent 300 N/cm
Bending cycles 5.000.000
Installation and assembly -5 ºC to +50 ºC
temperature
Operating temperature -25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature -30 ºC to +75 ºC
UL approval Type OFN (NEC Article 770, UL 1651)
CSA approval Type OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA-Standard C22.2 No232-
M1988)
Shipbuilding approval No
Chemical properties Conditionally resistant to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN EN ISO 4892-2,
procedure A; UV application 500 hours
In the meantime, the SC connectors have also become established. They are used mainly
with the SCALANCE products with a gigabit Ethernet interface.
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiberoptic cables by trained personnel. When fitted
correctly, they allow extremely low insertion loss and the value is highly reproducible after
multiple plugging cycles.
Preassembled cables
To be able to use glass fiberoptic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiberoptic cables
are also available with four BFOC or SC connectors already fitted.
For more details, refer to section Preassembled FO cables (Page 508).
CAUTION
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connectors with the supplied dust caps.
Note
Only remove the dust cap immediately before establishing the connection.
SC RJ connectors
POF and PCF FO cables are used to set up optical Ethernet/PROFINET networks indoors
and outdoors and used SC RJ connectors.
Ethernet/PROFINET devices with an integrated optical interface with SC RJ connectors
include, for example, SCALANCE X-200P IRT, ET200S.
The kit is available in a termination case. It consists of stripping tool, buffer stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, fiber cutter and microscope.
MLFB Name
6GK1900-0ML00-0AA0 SIMATIC NET termination kit SC RJ POF plug, termination case for
on-site assembly of SC RJ connectors consisting of stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, polishing set
6GK1900-0NL00-0AA0 SIMATIC NET termination kit SC RJ PCF plug, termination case for
on-site assembly of SC RJ PCF connectors consisting of stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, polishing set, fiber cutter
6GK1900-0MB00-0AC0 SIMATIC NET, IE SC RJ POF PLUG threaded coupling connector for
on-site fitting to POF FO cables (set of 20 duplex connectors)
6GK1900-0NB00-0AC0 SIMATIC NET, IE SC RJ PCF plug threaded coupling connector for
on-site fitting to PCF FO cables (set of 10 duplex connectors)
Table 10-58 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Standard Cable GP are available:
See also
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 µm (Page 487)
Table 10-59 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Ground Cable are available:
See also
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm (Page 488)
Table 10-60 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Trailing Cable are available:
See also
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL) (Page 489)
Table 10-61 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Trailing Cable are available:
See also
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL) (Page 489)
10.6.1 Antennas
vertical horizontal
opening opening
angle angle
G_IK10_XX_30027
Above and below the antenna there is no radiation. Moving away from the plane
perpendicular to the antenna, once the beamwidth is reached, the antenna gain has dropped
to half the value. The quality of the wireless connection then becomes noticeable poorer.
horizontal vertical
opening angle opening angle
G_IK10_XX_30028
Figure 10-38 Radiation characteristics of the ANT 792/3-8DR directional antennas
The ANT792-8DR and ANT793-8DR antennas differ in the beamwidth of the RF field:
Beamwidth
ANT792-8DR approx. 30°
ANT793-8DR approx. 20°
Overview
ANT792-8DN ANT793-8DN
Frequency range 2.4 GHz 5 GHz
Characteristics directional directional
Radiation angle 35° horizontal, 30° 18° horizontal, 18°
vertical vertical
Antenna gain 14 dBi 19 dBi
SWR max. 1.5 max. 1.5
Connectors N female N female
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature -40 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage -40 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +70 °C
temperature
Relative humidity 100 %
Degree of protection IP65
Dimensions (W x H x D) 200 x 200 x 43 190 x 190 x 31
in mm
Installation Wall or mast Wall or mast
Weight 500 g 700 g
Range with line-of-sight 1000 m 1000 m
and no disruption
Note
Actual range
The actual range may be significantly shorter than the value listed in the table and depends
on the spatial conditions, the wireless standard used, the data rate and the antenna being
used at the other end.
Note
Note on national wireless approvals
You will find the current national approvals on the Internet at
www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info
ANT795-4MR/MS
21,2 6
148
34,6 13
ANT792-6MN
ANT793-6MN
ANT795-6MN
ANT795-6DN
ANT792-8DN
ANT793-8DN
Overview
The information relates to the two RCoax cables with MLFB numbers 6XV1875-2A for 2.4
GHz and 6XV1875-2D for 5 GHz.
Construction
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Inner conductor Copper-clad aluminum,
diameter: 4.8 mm
Dielectric Polyethylene foam,
diameter: 12.4 mm
Outer conductor Overlapping copper foil with the slot groups
bonded to cable jacket
Cable jacket Polyethylene, pastel turquoise
diameter: 15.5 mm
Jacket thickness: 1.3 mm
Mechanical characteristics
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Minimum bending radius (once) 20 cm
Tensile strength 110 daN (1daN = 10 N)
Weight 0.232 kg/m
Recommended mounting distance 0.6 m
Electrical characteristics
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Impedance 50 +/- 2 Ω
Ratio of propagation speed 88%
Capacitance 76 pF/m
DC resistance at 20 °C Inner conductor: 1.48 Ω/km
Outer conductor: 2.9 Ω/km
Prohibited frequencies 535, 1070, 1605 +/- 65 MHz
2140 +/- 40 MHz
f α C50
[MHz] [dB/100m] [dB]
2400 17.0 59
2500 17.7 59
f α α
[MHz] [dB/100m] [dB/100m]
Cable installation 10 cm over Cable installation 15 mm over
concrete aluminum rail
5200 24 35
5800 28 39
f C50 C95
[MHz] [dB] [dB]
5200 43 47
5800 42 46
Notice: C50 and C95 apply here for an antenna distance of 10 cm from the cable
Resistance to fire
MLFB
SIMATIC NET, ANTENNA EXTENSION 6XV1875-3FH50 LENGTH: 5 M
CABLE FRNC FOR IWLAN ANTENNAS 6XV1875-3FN15 LENGTH: 15 M
ANT 790
Terminator TI795-1R
MLFB
6GK5795-1TR10-0AA6 SIMATIC NET, IWLAN TERMINATION
IMPEDANCE TI 795-1R, TERMINATOR 50
OHMS
MLFB
6GK5798-2LP00-2AA6 SIMATIC NET, IWLAN LIGHTNING
PROTECTOR LP 798-1N
10.6.4 SINEMA E
Note
Note that SINEMA E is a software product that is constantly being developed.
If you want to keep up to date with the current range of functions of the application, check
the Internet regularly:
http://www.siemens.de/sinema
Software requirements
To use its full functionality problem-free, SINEMA E requires the following software:
● Windows XP Service Pack 2 The available language versions of SINEMA E are German
and English.
Note
The release for Windows Vista is planned for Autumn 2007.
Hardware requirements
The computer on which you install SINEMA E should meet the following minimum
requirements:
● Processor speed 1 GHz
● 512 MB RAM
● Hard disk with 20 MB of free space to install SINEMA E. You also require enough space
for one or more projects. For more detailed information, refer to the current readme file
supplied with the software.
● Monitor resolution at least 1024 x 768 pixels
MLFB Version
6GK1781-0AA00-6AA0 SINEMA E 2006 LEAN ENGINEERING
SOFTWARE FOR PLANNING +
CONFIGURATION + SIMULATION OF WLAN
SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD SINGLE
LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A 2 LANGUAGES
(G,E);WIN XP PRO
6GK1782-0AA00-6AA0 SINEMA E STANDARD ENGINEERING
SOFTWARE FOR PLANNING +
AUTOPLACEMENT + CONFIGURATION +
SIMULATION + OPTIMIZATION * SITE SURVEY
OF WLAN SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD
SINGLE LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A 2
LANGUAGES (G,E);WIN XP PRO
6GK1782-4AA00-6AC0 SINEMA E POWERPACK UPGRADE OF
SINEMA E LEAN TO SINEMA E STANDARD
LICENSE SINGLE LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A
SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD 2 LANGUAGES
(G,E);WIN XP PRO
10.7 Accessories
C-PLUG
Power consumption 0.015 W
Power supply Supplied by end device
Memory capacity 32 Mbytes
MTBF > 600 years
C-PLUG
Operating temperature -20 °C - +70 °C
Storage/transport temperature -40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation < 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude 2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to IP20
C-PLUG
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 24.3 x 17 x 8.1 mm
Weight approx. 5 g
C-PLUG 6GK1900-0AB00
Note
The C-PLUG must only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is
turned off.
Overview
MLFB
6GK5791-1PS00-0AA6 SIMATIC NET, POWER SUPPLY PS 791 1-
1PRO (AC/DC POWER UNIT)
See also
IP65 power supply (Page 224)
General
This section describes the use of the IE FC Stripping Tool. This is the ideal tool for preparing
the IE FC cables and simplifies fitting the IE FC connectors to the IE FC cables. Please refer
also to the instructions in the user guide supplied with the IE FC Stripping Tool.
The cables must be prepared before the connector can be fitted. The IE FC connectors are
constructed so that the cables can always be stripped in the same way.
WARNING
The tool described in this manual is intended only for stripping SIMATIC NET Industrial
Ethernet FastConnect cables. If used elsewhere, accidents may occur or tools and cable
may be irreparably damaged.
The tool and must not be used on live cables under any circumstances.
1. Fit the required knife cassette in the 1. Take the stripping tool in your right 1. Fit the measured end of the cable in
stripping tool. When using stripping hand. the stripping tool. Limit stop for the
tool supplied with the yellow knife 2. Measure the cable length by placing cable length is the index finger of
cassette, the cutting depth must be the cable on the template. Use the your left hand.
adjusted with the middle socket index finger of your left hand as the
head screw after converting. limit stop.
1. Clamp the stripping tool as far as it 1. To strip the insulation, turn the tool 1. Keeping the it closed, pull the
will go. in the direction of the arrow stripping tool with jacket and
• approx. 4 times for PVC insulation remnants of the shield off the end of
the cable.
• approx, 8 times for PUR insulation.
1. After releasing the tool, remove the 1. If the white filler is not removed with 1. The protective foil is easier to
remnants of the cable from the tool. the insulation, remove it with your remove if you score it between the
hand. wires with a screwdriver.
1. Pull the protective foil off the wires. 1. Follow the instructions supplied with 1. Replace the knife cassette after
your connector or outlet. approx:
• 1500 operations with cables with
PVC outer jackets
• 150 operations with cables with
PUR outer jackets
1. Order numbers for knife cassettes:
• Green: 6GK1901-1GB01
• Yellow: 6GK1901-1GB00
Note
Using the IE FC Stripping Tool
The insulation piercing contacts of the FC RJ-45 plug can be released and recontacted up to
10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
To assemble a cable with crossed over wires, connect the color-coded wires at one end of
the cable in the connector as shown below:
- connect white with yellow
- connect blue with orange.
In the stripping tool, use the green knife Take the stripping tool in your right Place the cable in the stripping tool.
cassette 6GK1901-1GB01 hand. The index finger of your left hand is the
(5.1 mm knife distance)! Measure the cable length by placing limit stop.
When using stripping tool supplied with the cable on the template. Clamp the stripping tool as far as it will
the yellow knife cassette, the cutting Use the index finger of your left hand go.
depth must be adjusted with the middle as the limit stop.
socket head screw after replacing the
knife cassette.
Rotate the stripping tool to strip the Keeping the it closed, pull the stripping If the white filler was not pulled off
cable - with PVC insulation approx. 4 tool with jacket and remnants of the when you stripped the cable, remove it
times, - for PUR insulation approx. 8 shield off the end of the cable. and the transparent protective foil
times in the direction of the arrow. manually.
Cut off the dummy cores.
Spread out the cores according to their Insert the cores as far as they will go Press down the contact elements as far
colors on the contact elements of the into the contact elements of the FC RJ- as the limit stop to contact the cores.
FC RJ-45 plug. 45 plug.
Close the cover and turn the locking Insert a 2.5 mm screwdriver into the The connector is correctly locked when
mechanism with your hand as far as hole in the locking mechanism and the opening of the locking mechanism
possible in the direction of the arrow. continue turning it as far as the limit is at the side and the side edges are
stop. flush with the connector.
Note
The figures show how to fit an IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180. To fit the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145 or IE
FC RJ-45 Plug 90, the procedure is analogous!
Notes:
Replace the knife cassette if the cut is The insulation piercing contacts of the To assemble a cable with crossed over
not clean or after stripping FC RJ-45 plug can be released and wires, connect the color-coded wires at
approximately recontacted up to 10 times. one end of the cable in the connector
• 1500 operations with cables with Cable ends that have had a connector as shown below:
PVC outer jackets fitted, must not be used twice but must Connect white with yellow
• 150 operations with cables with be cut off before fitting a new Connect blue with orange.
PUR outer jackets connector.
See also
IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 463)
Instructions:
Remove the locking screw of Now release the two cover Lift up the upper part of the IE
the insert. (1.) screws that are now accessible FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet. (4.)
Pull the insert forward as far as Lift up the 4 terminals of the
the limit stop. (2.) terminal block. (5.)
Strip the approx. 55 mm of the Insert the wires pair by pair into Secure the wires in position by
jacket of the IE Hybrid Cable the wire channels of the pressing down the terminals as
2x2 + 4x0.34. insulation piercing terminals far as the limit stop.
Shorten the shield of the data according to the color codes in Repeat these steps until all four
wires by approx. 5 to maximum the picture on the left. pairs or wires are connected.
20 mm. The color codes on the terminal
Cut off the dummy cores. block of the modular outlet have
Spread the wires according to no meaning for the hybrid cable!
the color markings in the figure The ends of the wires must be
above. visible in the last viewing
Cut all the wires in a straight window of the terminal block
line to leave 48 mm to the cable and must meet the back panel
jacket. of the terminal block!
Center the cable in the shield Tighten the two cover screws. Fit the outlet on a DIN rail or
clamp so that the power wires Tighten the insert screw until the secure it to a smooth surface
are at the bottom in the shield insert is flush with the casing of using the three holes in the
clamp and the braided shield the outlet. casing.
makes contact with the
pressure surface in the upper
part of the outlet. (15.)
Fold down the upper part. (16.)
Make sure that the power wires
do not slip and are not jammed
by the lateral metal bars.
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
Note
The following inserts are available without basic housing
Insert 2FE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
Insert 1GE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
Note that the connection between IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlets with these inserts requires 8-
wire FastConnect cables (Cat6). The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 6XV1870--2J is not
suitable for operation of the 2FE and 1GE inserts!
Note
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
Current load maximum 0.5 A.
WARNING
Keep to the rules in the SCALANCE W manual for fitting an IP67 hybrid cable connector to
a SCALANCE W device!
Instructions
Remove the locking screw of Now release the two cover Lift up the upper part of the IE
the insert. (1.) screws that are now accessible. FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet. (4.)
Pull the insert forward as far as Lift up the 4 terminals of the
the limit stop. (2.) terminal block. (5.)
Use the green knife cassette Take the stripping tool in your Place the cable in the stripping
6GK1901-1GB01 (5.1 mm knife right hand. tool. Your left index finger is the
clearance) in the stripping tool. Measure the cable length limit stop.
Adjust the cutting depth of the against the stripping tool. Tighten the stripping tool until it
knife cassette if necessary with Use your left index finger as the locks into place (audible click).
the socket-head screws at the limit stop. (9.)
head of the tool.
Rotate the stripping tool to strip Remove the cable jacket, shield Cut off the central support
the cable and the white filler with your element.
- with PVC insulation approx. 4 hand.
times,
- for PUR insulation approx. 8
times
in the direction of the arrow.
Spread out the wires according Guide the wires according to the Secure the wires in position by
to the color markings on the color markings, pair by pair into pressing down the terminals as
terminal block of the Modular the wire channels of the far as the limit stop.
Outlet. insulation piercing terminals as Repeat these steps until all four
Do not undo the twisting of the far as the limit stop on the back pairs or wires are connected.
wire more than necessary to panel. (17.)
make the connection. The ends of the wires must be
Shorten the two middle pairs so visible in the last viewing
that all wires end in a line. window of the terminal block!
(18.)
Align the cable so that the Tighten the two cover screws. Fit the outlet on a DIN rail or
braided shield is in the center of (23.) secure it to a smooth surface
the middle section of the shield Tighten the insert screw until the using the three holes in the
clamp. insert is flush with the casing of casing.
Fold down the upper part. the outlet. (24.)
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
Note
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
Current load maximum 0.5 A.
WARNING
Keep to the rules in the SCALANCE W manual for fitting an IP67 hybrid cable connector to
a SCALANCE W device!
Terminating the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 with an IE IP67 hybrid plug
Remove the two inner shells of the universal
sealing ring to adapt it to the diameter of the
hybrid cable.
Insert the all the data leads at the same time into
the splice element is far as they will go.
Procedure
Contact 1
(Yellow) Contact 3
(White)
Insert the all the data leads at the same time into the
splice element is far as they will go.
Insert the data module and the splice element into the
supplied IDC assembly tool.
Position the top shield plate and press it over the cable
shield.
Position the lower shield plate and press it and the upper
shield plate together until they lock together with an
audible "click".
General
To maintain the excellent EMC and transmission characteristics of the twistedpair cabling
system, connectors must be fitted with extreme care. Follow the installation instructions
exactly.
How to fit 9pin and 15pin connectors is explained in detail on the following pages.
Note
Fit the D-sub connectors for self-assembly only to the 2x2 Industrial TwistedPair standard
cable. The cable clamp used for contacting the shield is designed for the diameter of this
cable.
These D-sub male connectors are not suitable for fitting to Industrial Ethernet FC cable
types.
&RYHU
&RYHUVFUHZ
&DEOHFODPSVFUHZ
&DEOHFODPS
&RQQHFWRULQVHUWZLWK
IRXUVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
&RSSHUEDQG
&RQQHFWRUFDVLQJ
Figure 11-1 Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (9-pin) for user assembly
Steps
1. Remove approximately 30 mm of the outer sheath from the braided shield.
30
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and pull off the loose shield.
10
5 10 15
5 9 1 6
6KLHOGIRLO
%UDLGHGVKLHOG
ZUDSSHGZLWK
FRSSHUEDQG
Figure 11-2 9-pin D-sub male connector fitted to the standard cable
Steps
1. Remove approximately 35 mm of the outer sheath from the braided shield.
35
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and pull off the loose shield.
Figure 11-4 15-pin D-sub male connector fitted to the standard cable
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables (Page 451)
Operation with 24 V DC
Numerous SIMATIC NET components require a voltage of 24 V DC as their operating
voltage or as auxiliary contact voltage. This power supply must meet the requirements of an
extralow voltage with reliable electrical isolation from the main power system, complying with
IEC 60950 or EN 60950 /18/.
Cabling components
Conductive cable path systems, barriers, and accessories must be included in the protective
measures preventing indirect contact (protection against illegal dangerous contact voltage).
Grounding conductors (PE) and equipotential bonding conductors must be installed
according to the requirements of systems in buildings complying with HD 384.4.41
(protection against electric shock) and HD 384.5.54 (grounding and grounding conductor).
The use of EN 501742 is recommended for the separation of low voltage cabling and IT
cabling.
The requirements of HD 384.4.47 S2 (application of measures for protection against electric
shock) and HD 384.4.482 S1 (selection of protective measures as a function of external
influences) and appropriate national or local regulations must be adhered to.
Note
The measures described here for mechanical protection apply both to electrical and optical
cables.
Fiberoptic cables
For communications between buildings and/or external facilities, the use of fiberoptic cables
is generally recommended. Due to the optical transmission principle, fiberoptic cables are
not affected by electromagnetic interference. Measures for equipotential bonding and for
overvoltage protection are unnecessary with fiberoptic cables.
Note
Fiberoptic cables are ideally suited for connections in areas with high EMI levels.
Remember, however, that bus components operating on an electrical basis such as OLMs,
OSMs etc. may require additional noise protection measures if they are operated in such
areas. These must be protected against unacceptable interference using the measures
already mentioned such as shielding, grounding, minimum clearance to sources of
interference etc.
BFOC connectors
Industrial Ethernet fiber-optic network components use only glass fiber-optic cables with
BFOC connectors.
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiber-optic cables by trained personnel. When fitted
correctly, they allow extremely low insertion loss and the value is highly reproducible after
multiple plugging cycles.
Preassembled cables
To be able to use glass fiber-optic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiber-optic cables
are also available with four BFOC connectors already fitted. See also preassembled FO
cables.
CAUTION
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connectors with the supplied dust caps. Only remove the dust cap
immediately before making the connection.
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 422)
Preassembled FO cables (Page 508)
Note
Adherence to the specified limit values can only be guaranteed when using components
from the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet range exclusively and by keeping to the
installation instructions in this manual!
connected to the CBN system as often as possible. Expansion joints and angled
connections should be bridged by additional flexible grounding bands. The connections
between the individual segments of channels must be protected from corrosion to ensure
longterm stability.
● The effectiveness of equipotential bonding is greater when the impedance of the bonding
conductor is low.
● The impedance of the additional bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the shield
impedance of parallel Industrial Twisted Pair cables.
● Protect the bonding conductor from corrosion.
● Install the bonding conductor so that the area enclosed by the bonding conductor and
signal cables is as small as possible.
● Use copper or galvanized steel for the bonding conductor.
For information about grounding and bonding techniques, refer to the system manuals of the
SIMATIC S7300 /9/, S7400 /10/ programmable controllers.
Note
Equipotential bonding is unnecessary if the sections of a system are connected exclusively
using fiberoptic cable (FO).
General
HD 384.3 S2 (IEC 603643:1993, modified, /22/) describes various power distribution
systems (TNS, TNC,S, TNC, TT and IT systems). Additional national or local regulations
stipulate the measures required for protection against electric shock and stipulate the
requirements for a grounding system (see also section 1.2 Protection against electric shock).
The outer surfaces of switching cubicles, device housings, connectors and bus cables are
conductive to provide shielding and must be connected to the grounding system to ensure
safety. To ensure that the EMC shield effect is achieved, they make further requirements of
the grounding system and grounding of the power distribution system. These result in an
alternating power distribution system with noncurrent carrying grounding conductors, for
example as in the TNS system.
Note
End devices and /or network components connected over shielded twistedpair cables must
only be supplied by alternating power distribution systems whose grounding conductors
cannot contribute to the transmission of energy. There must be no PEN cable within the
entire system. This condition is met, for example, by a TNS system.
Remember that sporadic events such as switching, short circuits, or atmospheric discharge
(lightning strike) can cause current peaks in the system many times higher than the
measured average value.
Troubleshooting
The following measures are suitable for troubleshooting:
● Restructuring the power distribution system (to form a TNS system)
● Replacing the electrical data cabling with fiberoptic cables
● Installing an equipotential bonding conductor parallel to the disturbed data cabling.
Note
If shield currents on bus cables cause problems in communication, the safest often
cheapest solution is to replace the disturbed electrical bus connection with a fiberoptic
cable.
Figure 11-9 Fiberoptic links avoid shield currents in the TNCS network
Shielding cables
The high degree of noise immunity of SIMATIC NET twisted-pair copper networks is
achieved by the exclusive use of shielded twisted-pair cables. The highly symmetrical
twisted signal wires are surrounded by a combination of foil and braided mesh shields. The
shield makes large-area, conductive contact with the casing of the attached end device or
network component at both ends of the twisted-pair cable via the connector/outlet. The entire
communications electronics, consisting of transmitter and receiver chips as well as the signal
cables is protected from electromagnetic influence from the outside world by a closed
"cocoon" of electrically conductive device casing and cable shield.
Note
The values specified for noise emission and noise immunity in the technical specifications of
all SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet components assumes the use of shielded twisted-pair
cables.
As explained in the installation rules for the devices, the shields of the twisted-pair cables
must make good conductive contact with the device housings at both ends. This is ensured
by the SIMATIC NET connectors designed specially to match the devices.
If, on the other hand, the rules are ignored and unshielded cables are used or the shields do
not make contact with the casing at both ends, there is no longer any guarantee that the
technical data regarding noise emission and noise immunity will apply. In this case, the
operators of the system must take responsibility themselves for compliance with the legal
limit values for noise emission and noise immunity (CE mark)!
Note
If there is a potential difference between the grounding points, an illegally high
compensating current can flow through the shield grounded at both ends. To rectify the
problem, do not, under any circumstances, open the shield of the bus cable.
This problem can be solved in the following ways:
● Install an additional bonding conductor parallel to the bus cable that takes over the shield
current.
● Use fiber-optic cable instead of electrical cable (safest solution).
Figure 11-10 Securing shielded cables with cable clamps and ties (schematic representation)
● When removing the sheath of the cable, make sure that the braid shield of the cables is
not damaged.
● To allow good contact between grounding elements, tin-plated or galvanically stabilized
surfaces are ideal. With galvanized surfaces, the necessary contact should be achieved
using suitable screws. Painted surfaces should be avoided at the contact points.
● Unless specifically intended for this purpose, shield clamps and contacts should not be
used for strain relief. The contact with the shielding bar could be impaired or be broken
altogether.
Cabinet lighting
Use bulbs for the cabinet lighting, for example LINESTRA lamps. Avoid the use of
fluorescent lamps since they cause interference. If you need to use fluorescent lamps, take
the measures shown in the figure below.
Fiberoptic cables
When using fiberoptic cables, mechanical protection is necessary, however the EMC rules
do not apply.
Grouping in categories
It is useful to group wires and cables into various categories according to the signals they
carry, possible interference signals, and their sensitivity to interference. Minimum clearances
can be specified for these categories so that interferencefree operation can be expected
under normal operating conditions if the clearance is adhered to.
Constraints
Grouping cables according to voltage classes assumes that the interference voltages relate
directly to the power supply voltage conducted (the lower the supply voltage, the lower the
interference voltage). Remember, however, that DC or 50 Hz power supply voltages do not
represent any danger to Industrial Ethernet bus cables. The critical interference voltages in
the kHz to MHz frequency range are created by the consumers connected to the cable. A 24
V DC cable with which a relay is switched regularly has a far more critical interference range
than a 230 V cable supplying a lightbulb.
In the information shown below, it is assumed that all the components within an automation
system and all the plant components controlled by the system (for example machines, robots
etc.) at least meet the requirements of the European standards for electromagnetic
Note
In general, the greater the distance between cables and the shorter the distances over
which the cables run parallel to each other, the less the danger of interference.
● Separate the cables according to the categories as described in table 11 and run the
various categories in their own channels/racks.
● If there is only one common metal channel available for all categories, either the
clearances shown in Table 11 must be maintained or the individual categories should be
separated from each other by metallic partitions. The partitions must be connected to the
channel making lowresistance and lowinductance contact.
● Cable racks should cross each other at right angles.
General
During installation, remember that LAN cables can only be subjected to a certain amount of
mechanical strain. Cables can be damaged or even destroyed by too much tensile stress or
pressure, by torsion or by bending them too sharply. The following instructions will help you
to avoid damage when installing LAN cables. If cables are subjected to strain or stress as
listed above, they should always be replaced.
Temperatures
During transportation, cabling and operation, the cable must not be exposed to temperatures
below the specified minimum temperature or above the specified maximum temperature
otherwise the electrical and mechanical characteristics of the cables can deteriorate. The
permitted temperature ranges of your bus cable can be found in the technical data sheets of
the bus cables
Tensile strength
The tensile force exerted on the cables during or after installation must not exceed the limits
of tensile strength of the cables. The permitted tensile strain on your bus cable can be found
in the technical data sheets of the bus cables.
Pressure
Too much pressure on the cables must also be avoided, for example crimping the cable
when securing it in position.
Torsion
Torsion can lead to the elements of a cable being displaced and degrading the electrical
characteristics of cables. Bus cables must therefore not be twisted.
Bending radiuses
To avoid damage within the bus cables, they must at no time be bent more sharply than the
minimum bending radius. Note the following:
● The permitted bending radii are larger when pulling in the cable under tensile strain than
in the fixed, installed state
● Bending radii for noncircular cables apply only to bending the flat, broader surface. Bends
in the narrower surface require much greater radii.
The permitted bending radii for your bus cable can be found in the technical data sheets of
the bus cables.
Avoid loops
When laying LAN cables, roll them tangentially from the cable drum or use appropriate rotary
tables. This prevents loops forming and resulting in kinks and torsion.
Electromagnetic immunity
Fiberoptic cables are immune to electromagnetic interference. Installing cables in cable
channels along with other cables (for example 230 V/380 V power supply cables) causes no
problems. When installing in cable channels, however, make sure that the permitted strain
on the fiberoptic cables is not exceeded when pulling in other cables later.
WARNING
Keep to the technical specifications
During installation and operation, all mechanical requirements for the cable such as
bending radii, tensile strain etc. must be kept to. If these are exceeded, there may be
deterioration of the transmission characteristics that can lead to temporary or complete
failure of the data transmission.
General
Electrical equipment is normally surrounded by a protective casing.
The purpose of this casing includes
● Protection of persons from touching live components or moving parts
(accidental contact protection)
● Protection of equipment from intrusion of solid foreign bodies (solid body protection)
● Protection of equipment from ingress of water (water protection).
IP 5 4
Code letters
(International Protection)
1. Code number (0 - 6)
Protection against accidental contact
and solid matter ingress
2. Code number (0 - 8)
Water protection
In some situations, the degree of protection is specified in even greater detail by adding
letters to the code numbers.
Scope of protection
The various degrees of protection are listed briefly in Tables 1-1 and 1-2. For more detailed
information on the individual ratings and the test conditions that must be fulfilled, please refer
to the standards listed above.
First number Protection of equipment from intrusion of Protection of persons from access to
solid foreign bodies dangerous parts
0 not protected not protected
1 ≥ 50.0 mm diameter back of hand
2 ≥ 12.5 mm diameter finger
3 ≥ 2.5 mm diameter tool
4 ≥ 1.0 mm diameter wire
5 dust protected wire
6 dustproof wire
Ventilation openings
The casings of most SIMATIC NET network components have ventilation openings. To allow
more effective cooling of the electronics components, ambient air can flow through the
casing. The maximum operating temperatures quoted in the technical specifications apply
only when there is unrestricted flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Depending on the size of the ventilation openings, such modules comply with degree of
protection IP 20, IP 30 to IP 40. You will find the precise degree of protection of a SIMATIC
NET component in its operating instructions.
Components with the degrees of protection mentioned above do not provide protection
against dust and water! If the installation site requires such protection, the components must
be installed in an additional enclosure such as a switching cubicle that provides the higher
degree of protection (for example IP65/ IP67).
If you install these components in an additional enclosure, make sure that the conditions
required for operation are maintained!
Heat dissipation
Make sure that the temperature inside the additional enclosure does not exceed the
permitted ambient temperature for the installed components. Select an enclosure with
adequate dimensions or use heat exchangers.
Outdoor installation
If you install the equipment outdoors, make sure that the additional enclosure is not
subjected to direct sunlight. This can lead to a considerable rise in temperature within the
enclosure.
Clearances
Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the component so that
● the convection cooling of the component is not restricted
● components do not cause neighboring components to heat up more than permitted
● there is enough space for installing cabling
● there is enough space to remove components for maintenance or repair.
Note
Regardless of the degree of protection of the casing, the electrical and optical ports are
always sensitive to
- mechanical damage
- damage caused by electrostatic contact discharge when touched
- contamination by dust and fluids
On devices with degree of protection IP65, always close unused ports with the supplied
dust protection caps. Remove these caps only immediately before connecting up the
cables to the ports.
Standards
EN 60529:2000 degree of protection due to casing (IP code) (IEC 60529:1999)
Introduction
This section provides with a basic overview of the standards generally relevant for
installation of networks in buildings and those particularly relevant for Industrial Ethernet.
Note
This section can only include basic information available at the time of going to print.
Fort more detailed and up-to-date guidelines, contact the PROFIBUS user organization e.V.
802.11
A series of standards for wireless network protocols developed by the IEEE.
Access point
A node in a WLAN that performs administrative functions in the network while at the same
time provides → clients with the connection to wired networks, other clients in the same
wireless cell or in other wireless cells.
ACL
"Access Control List", list with → MAC addresses with the right to access the wireless
network
Ad hoc network
Ad hoc network (ad hoc: Latin "for this purpose") is used in information technology to
describe a wireless network between two or more mobile end devices without a fixed
infrastructure.
This technology is used, for example, in Bluetooth to allow the spontaneous linking of mobile
phones, for example with headsets.
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
Aging time
The aging time is the time after which a learned → MAC address is discarded if an IE switch
has not received frames with this sender address during this time.
Antenna diversity
The simultaneous availability of two wireless interfaces on one device. In areas hostile to
wireless communication, it is possible to switch over to the interface with the frequency
currently providing the best reception.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
Autocrossover
Technique with which a → TP port is automatically switched over between → MDI and
→ MDIX pin assignment to make a connection regardless of the port pin assignment of the
device being attached. This means that crossover cables are not required. The
autocrossover function can only be used when the port is set to → autonegotiation mode.
Autonegotiation
Procedure standardized by IEEE 802.3 in which the transmission parameters (for example
10/100 Mbps, full/half duplex) are negotiated automatically between the devices.
Bandwidth
Practically synonymous with "maximum usable data rate". The term derives from the fact
that the transmission at a certain data rate occupiers a proportionally wide part of the
wireless spectrum.
BFOC
"Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector", a connector system for glass fiber FO cables with which
the cable is secured by a bayonet locking mechanism.
BOOTP
A protocol for automatic assignment of IP addresses. The IP addresses are provided by a
BOOTP server. → DHCP.
CLI
Command Line Interpreter. Option for configuring various devices based on a command line.
The CLI can be used with → TELNET over every Ethernet Port.
Client
A node of a WLAN without a infrastructure capability of its own that accesses a wireless
network via an → access point.
Collision domain
To ensure that the → CSMA/CD protocol functions correctly, the propagation time of a data
packet from one node to another is restricted. This propagation time results in a spatially
limited span for the network depending on the data rate known as the collision domain.
Connection monitoring
With regular link test pulses, a switch monitors the connected TP and FO cable segments for
short-circuits or interruptions. The switch does not send data to a segment from which it is
not receiving link test pulses.
CP 1515
Communications processor (wireless adapter) for a wireless connection of a laptop, a
programming device or an Internet pad with a WLAN. This is the predecessor to the
→ CP 7515. Both have been overtaken in the meantime by wireless interfaces integrated in
the PG.
CP 7515
Communications processor (wireless adapter) for a wireless connection of a laptop, a
programming device or an Internet pad with a WLAN. The CP 7515 has two wireless
interfaces (→ antenna diversity) and consists of a PCMCIA type II card that is inserted in the
appropriate slot of the laptop. In the meantime, the CP has been replaced by wireless
interfaces integrated in the PG.
C-PLUG
The C-PLUG (configuration plug) is an exchangeable memory medium of storing the
configuration data. If the device is replaced, the configuration can be adopted by swapping
the C-PLUG.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A checksum used in transmission protocols to detect errors in
frames.
CSMA/CA
"Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance", a method for detecting "collisions";
in other words, an attempt by more than one sender to start transmission on a frequency at
the same time. When this happens, both senders stopped at transmission and wait for a
more or less random time. They start their repeated transmission only when the other sender
has not started to transmit during this time. A second collision can only occur if both
randomly selected delays are identical.
Cut through
In the Cut Through process not the entire data package is stored temporarily in a buffer, but
is passed directly onto the target port as soon as the first 6 bytes (target address) have been
read. The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal.
The data is only stored temporarily using the store and forward mechanism when the section
between the target part and the port of the next switch is in use.
In PROFINET switches, cut through is implemented by using ERTEC-ASICs.
Default gateway
A network node that forwards all frames not addressed to stations in the same LAN (subnet).
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), like → BOOTP, a method for automatic
assignment of IP addresses. With DHCP, however, addresses can be assigned while the
device is operating.
Dispersion
Broadening and distortion of light pulses in fiber-optic cable due to signals arriving at
different times. On → multimode FOC, the distortion of the output signal is greater than with
→ single mode FOC.
DSSS
"Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum", a wireless modulation technique as used in
IEEE 802.11 standard "b".
Duplex connection
A connection between two nodes on which both can send and receive simultaneously. This
means that no collisions are possible during communication. "Switched LANs" operate with
D.
EAP
"Extensible Authentication Protocol", a protocol with which servers and clients can negotiate
a procedure for authentication prior to the actual authentication.
ESM
Electrical Switching Module – SIMATIC NET Ethernet switch with electrical ports.
Event
For Alarms & Events: An event is anything that happens that could be of interest to a client.
Although events can also be generated when a condition is met, they are not necessarily
dependent on conditions. Events that are not linked to conditions include, for example, error
messages of the communication system.
Fault mask
Specifies the desired status (good status). Deviations from this occurring during operation
are handled as faults.
Firewall
A computer or an application located between a local parent an external network to block
illegitimate data traffic between the networks. In this way, they prevent unauthorized access
from the outside.
FO port
Fiber Optic port
FRNC
"Flame-Retardant Non-Corrosive" a halogen-free, flame-retardant material for cable jackets.
No acids are released when FRNC burns.
GARP
"Generic Attribute Registration Protocol", previously "Group Address Registration Protocol",
a protocol for LANs with which the switches and end devices can exchange "attributes"
(node IDs, addresses etc.). This gives each node an overview of the structure of the entire
network.
Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode- it is only possible to either send or receive over the
interfaces at any one time.
Handover
The transfer of a mobile client from one access point and its wireless cell to the next (see
roaming); in particular, the reintegration in the network.
Hub
A device that operates like a → switch by connecting individual segments of a networked
together. In contrast to a switch, however, there is only a physical connection but no analysis
of the network traffic. The administrative advantages of using switches (routing network
traffic, collision rejection etc.) are therefore not available with hubs.
ICMP
"Internet Control Message Protocol", is used in networks to exchange information and error
messages via the Internet Protocol (→ IP). It is therefore located at the same level as, for
example, → TCP and → UDP. ICMP Operates at the same OSI Model layer as IP, at the
Network Layer (layer 3).
IEEE
"Institute of Electrics and Electronics Engineers", a US institute that works on guidelines and
technical recommendations, to some extent comparable with DIN.
IGMP
"Internet Group Management Protocol", a protocol with which a computer connected to the
Internet can inform a neighboring switch of the → multicast groups to which it belongs. This
protocol simplifies and speeds up communication when a message is intended for a larger
group of recipients. (mailing lists, audio and video streams, ...)
IP30
A degree of protection that indicates that a component in this category is protected from the
intrusion of coarse solid foreign bodies (as of 2.5 mm diameter), but is not protected from the
ingress of water. This corresponds to a normal electrical household appliance.
IP65
A degree of protection that indicates that the component in this category is fully protected
from dust and water jets. This corresponds to a practically airtight encapsulation.
IP67
A degree of protection that indicates that the component in this category is fully protected
from dust and water jets and will not be damaged by temporary immersion in water.
iPCF
"Industrial Point Coordination Function", a proprietary network protocol supported by
SIEMENS that is the basis of rapid roaming (see entry). The → handover times allow
roaming of mobile nodes to be reduced to the order of 30 ms.
IRT
"Isochronous Real Time Technology", real-time communication even under difficult
conditions (overload situation, complex network topology etc.). When this acronym is used in
device names, it identifies devices such as SCALANCE S switches that support IRT
technology.
ITP
"Industrial Twisted Pair", a cabling and connector technology for Ethernet adapted to the
requirements of an industrial environment.
IWLAN
An IWLAN is an "Industrial WLAN", in other words, a wireless network "hardened" to cope
with the wireless complications of an industrial environment.
LAN
"Local Area Network", a spatially restricted network, for example compared with the Internet
Latency
Latency specifies the time taken by frames to pass through a switch. This does not include
the time required for buffering frames.
LD
"Long Distance", an acronym used with SCALANCE S devices whose optical interfaces are
designed for particularly long distances
Load containment
With its filtering functions, a switch makes sure that local data traffic remains local. The local
network load of a segment is contained in the originating segment and does not represent
extra load on the remainder of the network.
MAC
"Media Access Control", a protocol for controlling access to a transmission medium (cable,
wireless) that cannot be accessed by all nodes at the same time.
MAC address
A worldwide unique identification number for every hardware component of importance in a
network.
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface, - straight.
On a MDI port or a MDI cable, the receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) cables are not crossed
over.
MDI-X
Medium Dependent Interface – Crossover. On an MDI-X port or MDI-X cable, the receive
(Rx) and the transmit (Tx) lines are crossed over.
MIB
Management Information Base. The MIB is a formal description of network objects in the
form of a tree structure that contains all the relevant information for network management in
→ SNMP.
Mirroring
A port (mirror port) with its specific data traffic can be mirrored to another port (monitor port)
for test purposes. Protocol analysis devices can be connected to the monitor port, in other
words, the monitor port is not available for data exchange. Mirroring has no effect on the
mirror port.
Modes
Modes are discrete waves used to transmit data within a fiber-optic cable. With → single
mode fibers, only one wave propagates, whereas in → multimode fibers several waves
propagate. Modes are patterns of electromagnetic fields in FOCs.
Multicast
A frame with a multicast address is received by all nodes prepared to receive this address.
Multimode
In multimode transmission, the pulse is transferred using many modes (waves) that travel
along curved paths or are reflected within the core. Attenuation is mainly caused by physical
absorption and dispersion as well as by mechanical bending. The amount of attenuation
depends among other things on the wavelength of the input light. Multimode fiber-optic
cables have an outer diameter of 125 µm and 50 or 62.5 µm core diameter. Due to the larger
core diameter the pulse edges degrade more than in single mode transmission resulting in
shorter transmission distances.
OFDM
"Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex", a wireless modulation technique used in the
IEEE 802.11 standards "a", "g" and "h"
Omnidirectional antennas
Antennas without a specific directional characteristic in contrast to directional antennas.
OSM
Optical Switching Module – SIMATIC NET Ethernet switch with optical ports.
Passive listening
Support of Rapid Spanning Tree Topology Change frames. When an RSTP topology change
frame is received, the → MAC address table is deleted.
PCF
Polymer Cladded Fiber
Optical fiber that can be assembled in the field and whose core is made of glass and jacket
made of plastic.
POF
Plastic Optical Fiber
Optical fiber that can be assembled in the field and whose core and jacket are made of
plastic.
PROFIDrive
PROFIdrive is the functional interface between controllers and drives in PROFINET and
PROFIBUS. PROFIdrive is defined by the PROFIdrive profile of the PROFIBUS user
organization (PNO).
PROFISave
A safety profile complying with safety standard IEC 61508 that allows the transmission of
standard and safety-oriented data on one bus cable and can be used regardless of the bus
medium. PROFIsafe is the first profile certified by the German TÜV for failsafe
communication for Ethernet.
PST
"Primary Setup Tool", a software tool for the basic parameter assignment of Web
components
RADIUS
"Remote Authentification Dial In User Service". a method in which the authentication is
handled on a separate server.
Rapid roaming
Roaming in which the re-establishment of the connection is so fast that there is no
appreciable interruption of connectivity (→ handover). Rapid roaming is implemented with
→ iPCF.
Reconfiguration time
The time required to restore a functional configuration if a device fails or a network cable is
interrupted.
RFC
"Request for Comments", the informal specification of a proposed standard for
communication, technology or method.
Ring port
Two ports in a switch via which this switch is connected to other switches to form a ring. One
switch must be configured as the → redundancy manager in the ring. This sends test frames
via the ring ports that are forwarded by all the ring ports of the other switches in the ring. This
makes sure that the ring does not have any interruptions.
RJ-45
"Registered Jack 45", a connector design with oblong jacks and 8 wires. RJ-45 connectors
are used, for example for telephones and Ethernet connections.
RMON
Remote Monitoring. RMON-compliant devices allow diagnostic data to be collected on the
device and read out by a network management station. This means that network problems
are detected early and can be eliminated. The particular advantage of RMON is that it is
independent of location. The acquired data can be analyzed at any point in the network with
suitable reporting software.
Roaming
The movement of a WLAN node from one wireless cell to the next.
RR
Acronym that identifies SCALANCE W devices that support → rapid roaming.
RSSI
"Received Signal Strength Indicator", a measure of the strength of the received wireless
signal. RSSI is generally standardized so that the value "100" represents the maximum
reception strength.
RSTP
"Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol", a protocol with which the switches of a network can
determine paths for delivering messages between end devices. If the network has a
redundant topology (in other words, if there are several different paths connecting the
relevant nodes), the failure of any component or a cable can be compensated by switching
over quickly to the alternative path. RSTP is a further development of → STP.
SC connector
A type of connector preferred for fibre-optic cables with a square connector and high packing
density.
SC RJ
A type of connector preferred for → PCF/POF fibre-optic cables with a square connector and
high packing density.
Segment
In the Ethernet bus system, transceivers connected together over the bus cable along with
the nodes connected over patch cables form a segment. Several such segments can be
connected via repeaters. When using twisted pair and fiber-optic cables, each subsection
forms a segment.
Signaling contact
Floating relay contact via which the detected error states can be signaled.
Single mode
In single mode transmission, (and monomode transmission) the pulse is transmitted by a
straight mode (wave). Attenuation is mainly caused by physical absorption and dispersion as
well as by mechanical bending. The amount of attenuation depends, among other things, on
the wavelength of the input light. The single mode fiber typically has a core diameter of 5 to 9
µm. The outer diameter is, however, once again 125 µm (compare multimode). The smaller
core diameter degrades the pulse edges less than multimode transmission and allows
greater transmission distances.
SMTP
"Simple Mail Transfer Protocol", the de facto standard for transferring mail over the Internet.
Spanning Tree
The Spanning Tree protocol (STP) allows redundant transmission paths. This prevents
circulating frames and, if a fault develops, provides an alternative path within 20 - 30
seconds (reconfiguration time).
Spoofing
A term used for various subterfuges used in computer networks to disguise one's own
identity.
Spoofing normally involves an attempt to falsify the data packets of the intruder so that they
have the sender address of a different (trustworthy) host.
SSID
"Service Set Identifier", within the framework of a → "Wi-Fi" WLAN, the name of a network
that needs to be known to all network nodes at the same time and that constitutes part of
each transferred message. SSIDs alone provide only extremely weak access protection from
third parties and should always be supplemented by other encryption methods.
SSL
"Secure Sockets Layer", a protocol for encrypted data transfer in the Internet is that obtains
its security by using "public key" algorithms.
Standby
Indicates the ability of a device to take over operation within a very short time.
STP
"Spanning Tree Protocol", a protocol similar to → RSTP, with which the switches of a network
obtain information about the topology in which they are located. STP has various
weaknesses that can be exploited by potential attackers and that are avoided in the further
development known as RSTP ("Rapid STP").
TCP
"Transmission Control Protocol", along with → UDP a further protocol for communication over
the Internet. In contrast to UDP, TCP is connection-oriented; in other words, a dialog is
established between the sender and recipient. The advantage of this is that the correct order
and completeness of a fragmented message can be checked. The drawbacks are the
greater overheads for communication and administration.
TCP/IP
"Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol", a set of protocols governing
communication over the Internet. Alongside → TCP that provides the "elementary" functions
(exchange of data frames, etc.), the "Internet Protocol" is used to implement the more
complex protocol layers (sequence of a session).
TELNET
With this protocol, an interactive connection can be established to another device in the LAN
or on the Internet. The user then has the same options as when directly connected to this
device with a terminal.
TFTP
"Trivial File Transfer Protocol"; a simple, UDP-based protocol for data transfer. Due to its
limited size, it can also be used by network nodes with little ROM.
TKIP
"Temporary Key Integrity Protocol", a protocol for dynamic changing of the RC4 key with
which message transmission is coded in a WLAN.
TP port
Port with a TP connector (RJ-45 jack)
UDP
"User Datagram Protocol", along with → TCP a further protocol for communication over the
Internet. UDP does not provide any mechanisms for checking the completeness or the order
of transmitted packets but does reduce the overheads resulting from the management
functions of more complex protocols such as TCP. UDP Is suitable particularly for sending
short messages to a large number of recipients (broadcasting/multicasting).
VLAN
Virtual LAN within a physically existing network.
VPN
"Virtual Private Network", the use of a "private" network that uses a "public" network to
transfer messages. The use of the private network is transparent for the nodes of the public
network; in other words, invisible. In contrast to the nodes of the public network, however,
the private messages can be encrypted or hidden using tunnel techniques. A VPN allows the
use of a protected network embedded in an unprotected environment.
WAN
"Wide Area Network", a spatially restricted network with a greatest span than a LAN
WBM
"Web Based Management", configurations of an active node from an external Web browser
that accesses a Web browser integrated in the node via an IE connection.
WDS
"Wireless Distribution System", a method for grouping several access points to link the
access points for an Extended Service Set (ESS).
WEP
"Wired Equivalent Protocol", an encryption method for wireless data traffic.
Western plug
A colloquial for → RJ-45 connector
Wi-Fi
IWLAN product identifier introduced by the "WiFi-Alliance" manufacturers' association for
products compatible with a certain subset of the → 802.11 standards; sometimes also
(incorrectly) used as a general synonym for → "WLAN".
WLAN
"Wireless Local Area Network", a wireless-based LAN
WPA
"WiFi Protected Access", an encryption method for wireless data traffic.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK is a weakened form of WPA. In this method, authentication is not established by a
server but is based on a password. This password must be configured manually on the client
and server. Wherever possible, you should change to the WPA method to achieve greater
security.
C
6
Cabinet lighting
62.5 µm fibers, 202
EMC, 569
Cable length, 104
Cabling, 573
8 Within buildings, 573
802.11 Within closets, 573
WLAN standards, 42 Carousels, 41
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection, 43
A CLI, 151
Client, 44, 66, 67, 68
Access point, 66, 67, 68
Client list, 153
Access Point, 44
Collision detection, 43
Active network components
Collision domain, 38
in PROFINET, 33
Command Line Interface, 151
Ad hoc
Compatibility list, 129
Wireless network, 67
Configuration limits
Ad hoc networks, 67
for Industrial Ethernet communications media, 31
Address Resolution Protocol, 154
Connectors
Advanced Encryption Standard, 43, 152
Fiber-optic cables, 312
AES, 43, 152
Power supply, 313
Antenna cables, 214
Signaling contact, 315
Antennas, 209
Twisted pair cables, 308
ARP protocol, 154
Connectors
AS-Interface system, 22
Power supply, 313
ATEX100a, 229
C-PLUG, 76, 163
Authentication
Cranes, 41
WLAN, 151
CSMA/CA, 43
Autocrossover function, 103
CSMA/CD, 43
Automated guided vehicle system, 70
L O
LD, 106, 111
OFDM, 42
Leaky feeder cable, 71, 213
Omnidirectional antennas, 69
Learning Table, 154
Optical Switch Module (OSM)
LED display
Functions, 172
System, 282
Housing, 391
LED display - Power, 281
Installation, 391
Lightning protection, 374
Linear bus topologies, 174
Lightning protector, 214, 346
Overlap AP, 152
Line
Network topology, 54
Logging functionality, 80
P
Packet filter, 36
M Passive network components
in PROFINET, 33
M12, 46
PAT, 154
MAC address filtering, 80
Patch cable, 190
MAC Dir filter, 156
Personal firewall, 37
MAC filter, 43, 155
Plug and play, 103
Managed Industrial Ethernet switches, 111
POF/PCF-LWL termination kit, 506
Management functions, 106
Polarity reversal protection, 313, 314
Manipulation, 81
Port, 36
Maximum lengths
Port Address Translation, 154
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable, 49
Port status
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable for
DMode A, 284
1 Gbps Ethernet, 50
DMode B, 285
Single mode glass fiber-optic cable, 49
DMode C, 286
Twisted-pair cable runs, 47
DMode D, 287
MDI/MDIX autocrossover function, 103
Power supply
Mesh
Degree of protection IP65, 224
Network topology, 84
IP30, pin assignment, 231
Mesh networks
PowerPack license
Topologies, 84
SINEMA E, 216
Monomode FO cables, 201
Primary area
Monorail suspension track, 41, 213
Cabling buildings, 187
Motion control, 22
PROFIBUS User Organization, 24, 583
Multichannel configuration
PROFIdrive, 22, 24
WLAN, 71
PROFINET
Multimode fiber-optic cable, 311
Cable assembly, 34
T V
TCP/IP, 21, 26 Virtual Private Network, 37
Technical specifications, 247 viruses
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, 152 Computer, 36
Termination kit, 506 VLAN, 128
Terminator, 214 VPN, 37
Tertiary area VPN tunnel, 82
Cabling buildings, 187
TIA, 26
TKIP, 152 W
Totally Integrated Automation, 26
WBM, 151, 152, 155
TPC/IP communication, 24
WDS, 71, 144, 155
Trailing cable, 41
Web Based Management, 23, 151, 177
Transitions from one media to another, 117
WEP, 42, 152
Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, 21
Western plug, 461
Trap, 177
Wi-Fi Protected Access, 42
Tree structure
Wired Equivalent Privacy, 42, 152
Network topology, 58
Wireless cell, 66, 68
Tunnel, 213
Wireless Distributed System, 71, 155
Tunneling, 37
Wireless networks
Twisted Pair Cord, 186
Structured, 68
Twisted pair interface converters
Unstructured, 67
Connector pinout, 458
WLAN, 40
WPA, 42
WPA (RADIUS), 152
U WPA2, 43
UDP/IP, 26 WPA-PSK, 152
Uninstalling, 300